###################################################################################### ## ## AVAYA IP TELEPHONE CONFIGURATION FILE TEMPLATE ## *** 04 SEP 2016 *** ## ## This file is intended to be used as a template for configuring Avaya IP telephones. ## Parameters supported by software releases up through the following are included: ## ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.3 ## B189 H.323 R6.6 ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.1.2 ## 96x0 H.323 R3.2.4 ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.14.5 ## 46xx H.323 R2.9.2 ## 46xx SIP R2.2.2 ## 364x SIP R1.1 ## 3631 H.323 R1.3.0 ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 ## 16CC SIP R1.0 ## 1603 SIP R1.0 ## 1692 H.323 R1.4 ## Softphone SIP R2.1 ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 ## ###################################################################################### ## ## Any line that does not begin with "SET ", "IF ", "GOTO ", "# " or "GET " is treated as a comment. ## To activate a setting, remove the "## " from the beginning of the line for that parameter so ## that the line begins with "SET ", and change the value to one appropriate for your environment. ## ## To include spaces in a value, the entire value must be enclosed in double quotes, as in: ## SET MYCERTCN "Avaya telephone with MAC address $MACADDR" ## ###################################################################################### ## ## List of MODEL4 values for models which support MODEL4 as testable parameter in the ## configuration file (for example: IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1603 GOTO SETTINGS16XX). ## 1603 ## 1608 ## 1616 ## 1692 ## 16CC ## 3631 ## 364X ## 4601 ## 4602 ## 4610 ## 4620 ## 4621 ## 4622 ## 4625 ## 4630 ## 9610 ## 9620 ## 9630 ## 9640 ## 9650 ## 9670 ## 9608 ## 9611 ## 9621 ## 9641 ## B189 ## H175 ## ###################################################################################### ## ## COMMON SETTINGS ## ## Settings in this section will be processed by all telephones, ## but not all parameters are supported by all telephones or all software releases. ## Settings for parameters that are not supported will be ignored. ## For more information, see the Administrator's Guide available at support.avaya.com ## ############### LAYER 2 VLAN AND QOS SETTINGS ############## ## ## L2Q specifies whether layer 2 frames generated by the telephone will have IEEE 802.1Q tags. ## Value Operation ## 0 Auto - frames will be tagged if the value of L2QVLAN is non-zero (default). ## 1 On - frames will always be tagged. ## 2 Off - frames will never be tagged. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via DHCP or LLDP. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later, Note: Value 1 has the same behavior as value 0. ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET L2Q 0 ## ## L2QVLAN specifies the voice VLAN ID to be used by IP telephones. ## Valid values are 0 through 4094; the default value is 0. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via DHCP or LLDP. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET L2QVLAN 5 ## ## L2QAUD specifies the layer 2 priority value for audio frames generated by the telephone. ## Valid values are 0 through 7; the default value is 6. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via LLDP and H.323 signaling, ## which would overwrite any value set in this file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET L2QAUD 7 ## ## L2QVID specifies the layer 2 priority value for video frames generated by the telephone. ## Valid values are 0 through 7; the default value is 5. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET L2QVID 7 ## ## L2QSIG specifies the layer 2 priority value for signaling frames generated by the telephone. ## Valid values are 0 through 7; the default value is 6. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via LLDP or H.323 signaling, ## which would overwrite any value set in this file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET L2QSIG 7 ## ## VLANSEP specifies whether VLAN separation will be enabled by the built-in Ethernet switch ## while the telephone is tagging frames with a non-zero VLAN ID. When VLAN separation is enabled, ## only frames with a VLAN ID that is the same as the VLAN ID being used by the telephone ## (as well as priority-tagged and untagged frames) will be forwarded to the telephone. ## Also, if the value of PHY2VLAN (see below) is non-zero, only frames with a VLAN ID that is ## the same as the value of PHY2VLAN (as well as priority-tagged and untagged frames) will be ## forwarded to the secondary (PHY2) Ethernet interface, and tagged frames received on the ## secondary Ethernet interface will have their VLAN ID changed to the value of PHY2VLAN and ## their priority value changed to the value of PHY2PRIO (see below). ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled. ## 1 Enabled if L2Q, L2QVLAN and PHY2VLAN are set appropriately (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.3.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; VLAN separation supported on H1xx have the following exceptions: ## 1. Priority-tagged and untagged frames from the network port will be forwarded to the PC port only when VLANSEP==1, ## H1xx sends tagged packets (L2Q==0 or 1 and VLANTEST==0 or timer < VLANTEST) and L2QVLAN<>0, else to both phone and PC ports. ## 2. No enforcement of PHY2VLAN and PHY2PRIO on tagged VLAN packets received from PC port. If VLANSEP==1, ## H1xx sends tagged packets (L2Q==0 or 1 and VLANTEST==0 or timer < VLANTEST) and 0<>PHY2VLAN<>L2QVLAN<>0 then: ## a. Untagged packets from PC port will be tagged with PHY2VLAN and priority==0. ## b. Tagged packets will be forwarded as tagged packets only if their VLAN equal to PHY2VLAN. ## Otherwise the packets from PC will be sent unmodified. ## Only in case of LANSEP==1,H1xx sends tagged packets (L2Q==0 or 1 and VLANTEST==0 or timer < VLANTEST) and 0<>PHY2VLAN<>L2QVLAN<>0, ## there will be full separation between PC and phone traffic. In all other cases, PC traffic can reach the phone. ## SET VLANSEP 0 ## ## VLANSEPMODE specifies whether full VLAN separation will be enabled by the built-in Ethernet switch ## while the telephone is tagging frames with a non-zero VLAN ID. This VLAN separation is enabled when: ## VLANSEP=1, L2QVLAN<> PHY2VLAN (and both has value different than 0), L2Q is auto (0) or (1) tagging. ## In this new VLAN separation scheme: ## - Untagged packets from PC port will be forwarded to network port only as untagged packets. ## - Tagged packets from PC port will be forwarded to network port only as tagged packets only in case ## their VLAN is equal to PHY2VLAN. ## In this mode, tagged and untagged packets from PC port will never reach phone’s port. ## - Untagged packets from the network will be sent to the PC port only. ## - Tagged packets from the network port will be sent to the PC port if their VLAN is equal to PHY2VLAN ## and to the phone if their VLAN is equal to L2QVLAN. ## - 802.1x/LLDP and Spanning tree packets are supported as in previous releases in this new mode. ## When VLANSEPMODE is 0, then the VLAN separation is based on previous releases where untagged packets ## from PC port can reach the phone. ## Please note that PHY2PRIO is NOT supported when VLANSEPMODE is 1. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default). ## 1 Enabled if VLANSEP, L2Q, L2QVLAN and PHY2VLAN are set appropriately ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET VLANSEPMODE 1 ## ## PHY2VLAN specifies the VLAN ID to be used by frames forwarded to and from the secondary ## (PHY2) Ethernet interface when VLAN separation (see VLANSEP above) is enabled. ## Valid values are 0 through 4094; the default value is 0. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via LLDP. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.3.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PHY2VLAN 1 ## ## PHY2PRIO specifies the layer 2 priority value to be used for frames received on the secondary ## (PHY2) Ethernet interface when VLAN separation (see VLANSEP above) is enabled. ## Valid values are 0 through 7; the default value is 0. ## The parameter is not supported when VLANSEPMODE is 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.3.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PHY2PRIO 2 ## ## PHY2TAGS specifies whether or not tags will be removed ## from frames forwarded to the secondary (PC) Ethernet interface. ## Value Operation ## 0 Tags will be removed (default) ## 1 Tags will not be removed ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET PHY2TAGS 1 ## #################### LAYER 3 QOS SETTINGS ################## ## ## DSCPAUD specifies the layer 3 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Code Point ## for audio frames generated by the telephone. ## Valid values are 0 through 63; the default value is 46. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via LLDP or H.323 signaling, ## which would overwrite any value set in this file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DSCPAUD 43 ## ## DSCPVID specifies the layer 3 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Code Point ## for video frames generated by the telephone. ## Valid values are 0 through 63; the default value is 34. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DSCPVID 43 ## ## DSCPSIG specifies the layer 3 Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Code Point ## for signaling frames generated by the telephone. ## Valid values are 0 through 63; the default value is 34. ## Note: This parameter may also be set via LLDP or H.323 signaling, ## which would overwrite any value set in this file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DSCPSIG 41 ## ###################### CALL QUALITY INDICATION SETTINGS ####################### ## ## WBCSTAT and QLEVEL_MIN configuration parameters related to the LOCAL network quality (MAY not be end to end indication). ## ## WBCSTAT specifies whether a wideband codec indication will be displayed when a wideband codec is being used ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.4 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET WBCSTAT 0 ## ## QLEVEL_MIN specifies the minimum quality level for which a low local network quality indication will not be displayed ## Value Operation ## 1 Never display icon (default) ## 2 Packet loss is > 5% or round trip network delay is > 720ms or jitter compensation delay is > 160ms ## 3 Packet loss is > 4% or round trip network delay is > 640ms or jitter compensation delay is > 140ms ## 4 Packet loss is > 3% or round trip network delay is > 560ms or jitter compensation delay is > 120ms ## 5 Packet loss is > 2% or round trip network delay is > 480ms or jitter compensation delay is > 100ms ## 6 Packet loss is > 1% or round trip network delay is > 400ms or jitter compensation delay is > 80ms ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.4 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET QLEVEL_MIN 4 ## ###################### DHCP SETTINGS ####################### ## ## DHCPSTD specifies whether DHCP will comply with the IETF RFC 2131 standard and ## immediately stop using an IP address if the lease expires, or whether it will ## enter an extended rebinding state in which it continues to use the address and ## to periodically send a rebinding request, as well as to periodically send an ## ARP request to check for address conflicts, until a response is received from ## a DHCP server or until a conflict is detected. ## Value Operation ## 0 Continue using the address in an extended rebinding state (default). ## 1 Immediately stop using the address. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.1 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DHCPSTD 1 ## ## VLANTEST specifies the number of seconds that DHCP will be attempted with a ## non-zero VLAN ID before switching to a VLAN ID of zero (if the value of L2Q is 1) ## or to untagged frames (if the value of L2Q is 0). ## Valid values are 0 through 999; the default value is 60. ## A value of zero means that DHCP will try with a non-zero VLAN ID forever. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; Note: L2Q==1 has the same behavior as L2Q==0. ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.8 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VLANTEST 90 ## ## REUSETIME specifies the number of seconds that DHCP will be attempted with a VLAN ID of ## zero (if the value of L2Q is 1) or with untagged frames (if the value of L2Q is 0 or 2) ## before reusing the IP address (and associated address information) that it had the last ## time it successfully registered with a call server, if such an address is available. ## While reusing an address, DHCP will enter the extended rebinding state described above ## for DHCPSTD. ## Valid values are 0 and 20 through 999; the default value is 60. ## A value of zero means that DHCP will try forever (i.e., no reuse). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (REUSE mechanism is supported on Ethernet interface only (not Wi-Fi)) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET REUSETIME 90 ## ####################### DNS SETTINGS ####################### ## ## DNSSRVR specifies a list of DNS server addresses. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal (IPv4) or colon-hex (IPv6, if supported) ## format, separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## A value set in this file will replace any value set for DNSSRVR via DHCP. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.6 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 3631 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DNSSRVR 198.152.15.15 ## ## DOMAIN specifies a character string that will be appended to parameter values ## that are specified as DNS names, before the name is resolved. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.6 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (up to 63 characters only) ## 3631 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DOMAIN mycompany.com ## ###################### LOGIN SETTINGS ###################### ## ## QKLOGINSTAT specifies whether a password must always be entered manually at the login screen. ## Value Operation ## 0 Manual password entry is mandatory. ## 1 A "quick login" is allowed by pressing the # or Continue key (Default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## SET QKLOGINSTAT 0 ## ## CLEAR_EXTPSWD_ON_LOGOUT specifies whether extension and password are deleted as part of logout. ## Value Operation ## 0 Extension and password are not deleted in case of logout (Default) ## 1 Extension and password are deleted in case of logout ## Note: "quick login" (QKLOGINSTAT ==1) will not be supported when CLEAR_EXTPSWD_ON_LOGOUT==1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.3 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6.3 and later ## SET CLEAR_EXTPSWD_ON_LOGOUT 1 ## ################### SERVER SETTINGS (H.323) ################ ## ## MCIPADD specifies a list of H.323 call server IP addresses. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal (IPv4), colon-hex (IPv6, if supported), or ## DNS name format, separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## A value set in this file will replace any value set for MCIPADD via DHCP. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 3631 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later SET MCIPADD 10.128.20.20 ## ## VUMCIPADD specifies a list of H.323 call server IP addresses for the Visiting User feature. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal (IPv4) or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.5 and later ## SET VUMCIPADD callsv1.myco.com,callsv2.myco.com,135.42.28.66 ## ## STATIC specifies whether a file server or call server IP address that has been ## manually programmed into the telephone will be used instead of values received ## for TLSSRVR, HTTPSRVR or MCIPADD via DHCP or this settings file. ## Value Operation ## 0 File server and call server IP addresses received via DHCP or ## this file are used instead of manually programmed values (default). ## 1 A manually programmed file server IP address will be used. ## 2 A manually programmed call server IP address will be used. ## 3 A manually programmed file server or call server IP address will be used. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET STATIC 0 ## ## UNNAMEDSTAT specifies whether unnamed registration will be initiated by the telephone ## if a value is not entered at the Extension registration prompt within one minute. ## Unnamed registration provides the telephone with a restricted class of service ## (such as emergency calls) if administered on the call server. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.8.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 1692 H.323 R1.4 and later ## SET UNNAMEDSTAT 0 ## ## REREGISTER specifies the delay interval in minutes before and between reregistration attempts. ## Valid values are 1 through 120; the default value is 20. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET REREGISTER 25 ## ## UDT Specifies the Unsuccessful Discovery Timer (UDT) in minutes. ## The Unsuccessful Discovery Timer is the time that the phone perform discovery ## with list of gatekeepers configured and after which the phone will reboot if there is no ## successful discovery with a gatekeeper from the list. ## Valid values are 10 through 960; the default value is 10. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET UDT 960 ## ## H323SIGPROTOCOL specifies which security profiles are enabled with H.323 signaling. ## The phone publishes (in the GRQ message) the list of security profiles configured in H323SIGPROTOCOL. ## The phone ignores responses from call server with security profiles that are not configured in H323SIGPROTOCOL. ## Value Operation ## 0 TLS, Annex-H and Challenge authentication are allowed (default). ## 1 TLS and Annex-H are allowed. ## 2 TLS only is allowed ## Note: The security profile in ip-network-region SAT screen can be configured as "H323TLS" for TLS, "strong" for both TLS and Annex-H, ## "pin-eke" for Annex-H and "challenge" for Challenge authentication. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.2 and later releases ## SET H323SIGPROTOCOL 1 ## ## GRATARP specifies whether an existing ARP cache entry will be updated with a MAC address ## received in a gratuitous (unsolicited) ARP message. ## Value Operation ## 0 Gratuitous ARP messages will be ignored (default). ## 1 Gratuitous ARP messages will be processed to update an existing ARP cache entry. ## Note: In an H.323 Processor Ethernet Duplication (PE Dup) environment, ## if the PE Dup server and the telephone are in the same subnet, this should be set to 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later releases ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later releases ## SET GRATARP 0 ## ######### GUEST LOGIN (AND VISITING USER) SETTINGS (H.323 only) ######### ## ## GUESTLOGINSTAT specifies whether the Guest Login feature is available to users. ## Value Operation ## 0 Guest Login feature is not available to users (default) ## 1 Guest Login feature is available to users SET GUESTLOGINSTAT 1 ## ## GUESTDURATION specifies the duration (in hours) before a Guest Login or a ## Visiting User login will be automatically logged off if the telephone is idle. ## Valid values are integers from 1 to 12, with a default value of 2. SET GUESTDURATION 2 ## ## GUESTWARNING specifies the number of minutes before time specified by GUESTDURATION that ## a warning of the automatic logoff is initially presented to the Guest or Visiting User. ## Valid values are integers from 1 to 15, with a default value of 5. SET GUESTWARNING 10 ## ################# SERVER SETTINGS (SIP) ################ ## ## SIPDOMAIN specifies the domain name to be used during SIP registration. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (up to 60 characters only) ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET SIPDOMAIN sip.severin.de ## ## SIPPORT specifies the port the telephone will open to receive SIP signaling messages. ## Valid values are 1024 through 65535; the default value is 5060. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## Note: Older SIP software releases also use the value of this parameter as the ## destination port for transmitted SIP messages. However, for newer releases ## that support SIP_CONTROLLER_LIST (see below), the value of that parameter ## is used to specify the destination port for transmitted SIP messages. SET SIPPORT 5061 ## ## SIP_CONTROLLER_LIST specifies a list of SIP controller designators, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces, ## where each controller designator has the following format: ## host[:port][;transport=xxx] ## host is an IP address in dotted-decimal (DNS name format is not supported). ## [:port] is an optional port number. ## [;transport=xxx] is an optional transport type where xxx can be tls, tcp, or udp. ## If a port number is not specified a default value of 5060 for TCP and UDP or 5061 for TLS is used. ## If a transport type is not specified, a default value of tls is used. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; udp is not supported. SET SIP_CONTROLLER_LIST avayasip.severin.de:5061;transport=tls ## ## SIPREGPROXYPOLICY specifies whether the telephone will attempt to maintain ## one or multiple simultaneous registrations. ## Value Operation ## alternate Only a single registration will be attempted and maintained. ## simultaneous Simultaneous registrations will be attempted and maintained with all available controllers. ## This parameter is supported by: ## Not supported in 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later; the default value is simultaneous. ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x; the default value is alternate. ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later; the default value is alternate. SET SIPREGPROXYPOLICY simultaneous ## ## SIMULTANEOUS_REGISTRATIONS specifies the number of Session Managers ## with which the telephone will simultaneously register. ## Valid values are 1, 2 or 3; the default value is 3. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; For IP office environment this parameter shall be set to 1. SET SIMULTANEOUS_REGISTRATIONS 3 ## ## CONNECTION_REUSE specifies whether the telephone will use two UDP/TCP/TLS connection (for both outbound ## and inbound) or one UDP/TCP/TLS connection. ## Value Operation ## 0 - disabled, the phone will open oubound connection to the SIP Proxy and listening socket for inbound connection ## from SIP proxy in parallel. This is the only and default behavior for pre-6.4 releases. ## 1 - enabled, the phone will not open a listening socket and will maintain and re-use the sockets it creates with ## the outbound proxies (default) ## For IP office environment this parameter shall be set to 1 (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.4 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET CONNECTION_REUSE 1 ## ## ENABLE_PPM_SOURCED_SIPPROXYSRVR parameter enables PPM as a source of SIP proxy server information. ## Value Operation ## 0 Proxy server information received from PPM will not be used. ## 1 Proxy server information received from PPM will be used (default). ## This parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as PPM is not supported. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET ENABLE_PPM_SOURCED_SIPPROXYSRVR 1 ## ## CONFIG_SERVER specifies the address of the Avaya configuration server. ## Zero or one IP address in dotted decimal or DNS name format, ## optionally followed by a colon and a TCP port number. ## The value may contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as PPM is not supported. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.7 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CONFIG_SERVER sip.severin.de ## ## CONFIG_SERVER_SECURE_MODE specifies whether HTTP or HTTPS is used to access the configuration server. ## Value Operation ## 0 use HTTP (default for 96x0 R2.0 through R2.5) ## 1 use HTTPS (default for other releases and products) ## 2 use HTTPS if SIP transport mode is TLS, otherwise use HTTP ## This parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as PPM is not supported. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CONFIG_SERVER_SECURE_MODE 1 ## ## VOLUME_UPDATE_DELAY specifies the minimum interval, in seconds, between backups of the volume levels to PPM service ## when the phone registered to Avaya Aura Session Manager. If no change to volume levels, there will be no backup to PPM service. ## Valid values are 2 through 900; the default value is 2. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.1 and later ## SET VOLUME_UPDATE_DELAY 20 ## ## SIPPROXYSRVR specifies a list of addresses of SIP proxy servers. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 through R2.4 ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (only supports one address) ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SIPPROXYSRVR sip.severin.de ## ## SIPSIGNAL specifies the type of transport used for SIP signaling. ## Value Operation ## 0 UDP ## 1 TCP ## 2 TLS (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 through R2.4 ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later SET SIPSIGNAL 2 ## ## SIP_PORT_SECURE specifies the destination TCP port for SIP messages sent over TLS. ## Valid values are 1024 through 65535; the default value is 5061. ## The parameter is used in non-Avaya environment. In Avaya environment, this ## parameter will be overwritten by PPM configuration. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 through R2.4 ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET SIP_PORT_SECURE 5061 ## ## ENABLE_AVAYA_ENVIRONMENT specifies whether the telephone is configured ## for use in an Avaya (SES) or a third-party proxy environment. ## Value Operation ## 0 3rd party proxy with "SIPPING 19" features ## 1 Avaya SES with AST features and PPM (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; for IP office environment this parameter shall be set to 0. ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 through R2.4 ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later SET ENABLE_AVAYA_ENVIRONMENT 1 ## ## ######### NON-AVAYA ENVIRONMENT SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ######## ## ## MWISRVR specifies a list of addresses of Message Waiting Indicator servers. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MWISRVR 192.168.0.7 ## ## DIALPLAN specifies the dial plan used in the telephone. ## It accelerates dialing by eliminating the need to wait for ## the INTER_DIGIT_TIMEOUT timer to expire. ## The value can contain 0 to 1023 characters; the default value is null (""). ## See the telephone Administrator's Guide for format and setting alternatives. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DIALPLAN [3]xxx|[4]xxx|[5]xxx ## ## PHNNUMOFSA specifies the number of Session Appearances the telephone ## should support while operating in a non-Avaya environment. ## Valid values are 1 through 10; the default value is 3. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PHNNUMOFSA 3 ## ################## TIME SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ################# ## ## SNTPSRVR specifies a list of addresses of SNTP servers. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (only supports one address) ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET SNTPSRVR 10.128.20.100 ## ## GMTOFFSET specifies the time offset from GMT in hours and minutes. ## The format begins with an optional "+" or "-" ("+" is assumed if omitted), ## followed by 0 through 12 (hours), followed by a colon (:), ## followed by 00 through 59 (minutes). The default value is 0:00. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 only (TIMEZONE shall be used in R1.0.0.1 and later) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (see Note below) ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## Note: For the 364x, only values of 00, 15, 30 and 45 are supported for minutes, ## other values are set to 00. SET GMTOFFSET 1:00 ## ## DSTOFFSET specifies the time offset in hours of daylight savings time from local standard time. ## Valid values are 0, 1, or 2; the default value is 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 only (TIMEZONE shall be used in R1.0.0.1 and later) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET DSTOFFSET 1 ## ## DSTSTART specifies when to apply the offset for daylight savings time. ## The default value for all telephones except the 46xx is 2SunMar2L ## (the second Sunday in March at 2AM local time). ## The default value for 46xx telephones is 1SunApr2L ## (the first Sunday in April at 2AM local time), ## which is now obsolete for North America so it should be set below. ## See the Administrator's Guide for format and setting alternatives. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 only (TIMEZONE shall be used in R1.0.0.1 and later) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET DSTSTART 2SunMar2L ## ## DSTSTOP specifies when to stop applying the offset for daylight savings time. ## The default value for all telephones except the 46xx is 1SunNov2L ## (the first Sunday in November at 2AM local time). ## The default value for 46xx telephones is LSunOct2L ## (the last Sunday in October at 2AM local time), ## which is now obsolete for North America so it should be set below. ## See the Administrator's Guide for format and setting alternatives. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 only (TIMEZONE shall be used in R1.0.0.1 and later) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET DSTSTOP LSunOct2L ## ## TIMEZONE specifies timezone configuration in Olson name format as appears in the tzone database ## maintained by IANA. Default value is “Etc/GMT” which means +00:00. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.0.1 and later ## SET TIMEZONE America/New_York SET TIMEZONE Europe/Berlin ## ################## TIMER SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ############### ## ## WAIT_FOR_REGISTRATION_TIMER specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## for a response to a REGISTER request. If no response message is received within this time, ## registration will be retried based on the value of RECOVERYREGISTERWAIT. ## Valid values are 4 through 3600; the default value is 32. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## Note: For Avaya Distributed Office configurations prior to R2.0, this parameter must be set to 60. ## SET WAIT_FOR_REGISTRATION_TIMER 60 ## ## REGISTERWAIT specifies the number of seconds between re-registrations with the current server. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later; valid values are 30 to 86400; the default value is 900. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; valid values are 30 to 86400; the default value is 900. ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later; valid values are 30 to 86400; the default value is 900. ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 through R2.2; valid values are 10 to 1000000000; the default value is 3600. ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later; valid values are 0 to 65535; the default value is 3600. ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later; valid values are 60 to 3600; the default value is 3600. ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later; valid values are 10 to 1000000000; the default value is 3600. ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later; valid values are 30 to 86400; the default value is 900. ## SET REGISTERWAIT 1000 ## ## RECOVERYREGISTERWAIT specifies a number of seconds. ## If no response is received to a REGISTER request within the number of seconds specified ## by WAIT_FOR_REGISTRATION_TIMER, the telephone will try again after a randomly selected ## delay of 50% to 90% of the value of RECOVERYREGISTERWAIT. ## Valid values are 10 through 36000; the default value is 60. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later; not supported in R6.2 and later. ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET RECOVERYREGISTERWAIT 90 ## ## WAIT_FOR_UNREGISTRATION_TIMER specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## before assuming that an un-registration request is complete. ## Un-registration includes termination of registration and all active dialogs. ## Valid values are 4 through 3600; the default value is 32. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET WAIT_FOR_UNREGISTRATION_TIMER 45 ## ## WAIT_FOR_INVITE_RESPONSE_TIMEOUT specifies the maximum number of seconds that the ## telephone will wait for another response after receiving a SIP 100 Trying response. ## Valid values are 30 through 180; the default value is 60. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. SET WAIT_FOR_INVITE_RESPONSE_TIMEOUT 90 ## ## OUTBOUND_SUBSCRIPTION_REQUEST_DURATION specifies the duration in seconds requested by the ## telephone in SUBSCRIBE messages, which may be decreased in the response from the server. ## Valid values are 60 through 31536000 (one year); the default value is 86400 (one day). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later. ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (currently used only for avaya-ccs-profile ## subscription as message-summary is controlled by REGISTERWAIT timer). ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET OUTBOUND_SUBSCRIPTION_REQUEST_DURATION 604800 ## ## NO_DIGITS_TIMEOUT specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## for a digit to be dialed after going off-hook before generating a warning tone. ## Valid values are 1 through 60; the default value is 20. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later SET NO_DIGITS_TIMEOUT 20 ## ## INTER_DIGIT_TIMEOUT specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## after a digit is dialed before sending a SIP INVITE. ## Valid values are 1 through 10; the default value is 5. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET INTER_DIGIT_TIMEOUT 3 ## ## FAILED_SESSION_REMOVAL_TIMER specifies the number of seconds the telephone will ## display a session line appearance and generate re-order tone after an invalid ## extension has been dialed if the user does not press the End Call softkey. ## Valid values are 5 through 999; the default value is 30. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later SET FAILED_SESSION_REMOVAL_TIMER 30 ## ## TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_STATUS specifies whether or not the telephone sends TCP keep alive messages. ## Value Operation ## 0 Keep-alive messages are not sent ## 1 Keep-alive messages are sent (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_STATUS 1 ## ## TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_TIME specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## before sending out a TCP keep-alive (TCP ACK) message. ## Valid values are 10 through 3600; the default value is 60. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_TIME 60 ## ## TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## before re-transmitting a TCP keep-alive (TCP ACK) message. ## Valid values are 5 through 60; the default value is 10. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later #SET TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL 10 ## ## CONTROLLER_SEARCH_INTERVAL specifies the number of seconds the telephone will wait ## to complete the maintenance check for monitored controllers. ## Valid values are 4 through 3600. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later (default value is 16) ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (default value is 16) ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later (default value is 16) ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 - R2.6.4 (default value is 4) ## SET CONTROLLER_SEARCH_INTERVAL 20 ## ## ASTCONFIRMATION specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait to validate ## an active subscription when it SUBSCRIBEs to the "avaya-cm-feature-status" package. ## Valid values are 16 through 3600; the default value is 60. ## This parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as there is no subscription to Avaya-cm-feature-status. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6 and later SET ASTCONFIRMATION 90 ## ## FAST_RESPONSE_TIMEOUT specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## before terminating an INVITE transaction if no response is received. ## However, a value of 0 means that this timer is disabled. ## Valid values are 0 through 32; the default value is 4. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later, not supported in R6.2 and later. ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later SET FAST_RESPONSE_TIMEOUT 30 ## ## RDS_INITIAL_RETRY_TIME specifies the number of seconds that the telephone will wait ## the first time before trying to contact the PPM server again after a failed attempt. ## Each subsequent retry will be delayed by double the previous delay. ## Valid values are 2 through 60, the default value is 2. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET RDS_INITIAL_RETRY_TIME 4 ## ## RDS_MAX_RETRY_TIME specifies the maximum delay interval in seconds after which ## the telephone will abandon its attempt to contact the PPM server. ## Valid values are 2 through 3600, the default value is 600. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## SET RDS_MAX_RETRY_TIME 600 ## ## RDS_INITIAL_RETRY_ATTEMPTS specifies the number of retries after which ## the telephone will abandon its attempt to contact the PPM server. ## Valid values are 1 through 30, the default value is 15. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later SET RDS_INITIAL_RETRY_ATTEMPTS 15 ## ############# CONFERENCING SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ############# ## ## CONFERENCE_FACTORY_URI specifies the URI for Avaya Aura Conferencing. ## Valid values contain zero or one URI, ## where a URI consists of a dial string followed by "@" followed by a domain, ## which must match the routing pattern configured in System Manager for Adhoc Conferencing. ## Depending on the dial plan, the dial string may need a prefix code, such as a 9 to get an outside line. ## The domain portion of the URI can be in the form of an IP address or an FQDN. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2.1 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CONFERENCE_FACTORY_URI "93375000@avaya.com" ## ## EVENT_NOTIFY_AVAYA_MAX_USERS specifies the maximum number of users to be included in ## an event notification message from CM/AST-II or Avaya Aura Conferencing R6.0 or later. ## Valid values are 0 through 1000; the default value is 20. ## It is used only for development and debugging purposes. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET EVENT_NOTIFY_AVAYA_MAX_USERS 10 ## ## SIGNAL_P_CONFERENCE_SIP_HEADER specifies whether P-Conference header shall be sent in SIP 200 OK message ## to the AAC conferencing server. ## Value Operation ## 0 P-Conference header will not be sent ## 1 P-Conference header will be sent (Default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SIGNAL_P_CONFERENCE_SIP_HEADER 0 ## ################ PRESENCE SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ############## ## ## ENABLE_PRESENCE specifies whether presence will be supported. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later (default is 1) ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.8 and later (default is 1) ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.6 and R2.6.7 (default is 0) ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (default is 1); For IP office environment this parameter shall be set to 0 as presence is not supported. SET ENABLE_PRESENCE 1 ## ## PRESENCE_SERVER specifies the address of the Presence server. ## Zero or one IP address in dotted decimal, ## optionally followed by a colon and a TCP port number. ## The default value is null (""). ## Note: Starting with 96x1 R6.5 SIP, if the phone is deployed with Aura Platform 6.2 FP4 and later, ## the value of this parameter is used from PPM and not from the settings file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.6 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; this parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as presence is not supported. SET PRESENCE_SERVER avayasip.severin.de ## ## PRESENCE_ACL_CONFIRM specifies the handling of a Presence ACL update with pending watchers. ## Value Operation ## 0 Auto confirm - automatically send a PUBLISH to allow presence monitoring (Default) ## 1 Ignore - take no action ## 2 Prompt - the phone directly prompting the user to Allow or Deny the watcher’s request. ## This parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as presence is not supported. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later (values 0-1) ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (values 0-2) SET PRESENCE_ACL_CONFIRM 0 ## ## ENABLE_AUTOMATIC_ON_THE_PHONE_PRESENCE controls whether “on the phone” presence status ## is sent out automatically when user is on a call (or goes off-hook). ## Note that calls on bridged line appearances (that local user has not bridged to) ## do not affect the trigger of the “on the phone” presence update. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (Default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; this parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as presence is not supported. SET ENABLE_AUTOMATIC_ON_THE_PHONE_PRESENCE 1 ## ## AWAY_TIMER_VALUE controls the amount of time in minutes where there was no interaction ## with the device after which the device assumes that the user is away from the device. ## The range is 1-1500 minutes. The default value is 30 minutes. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; this parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as presence is not supported. SET AWAY_TIMER_VALUE 30 ## ## AWAY_TIMER controls whether the device report an ‘away’ state. ## When this parameter is set to 1, the device will automatically report an ‘away’ state. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (Default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; this parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as presence is not supported. SET AWAY_TIMER 1 ## ########### INSTANT MESSAGING SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ########## ## ## INSTANT_MSG_ENABLED specifies whether Instant Messaging will be enabled or disabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET INSTANT_MSG_ENABLED 1 ## ############### EXCHANGE SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ############### ## ## EXCHANGE_SERVER_LIST specifies a list of one or more Exchange server IP addresses. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_SERVER_LIST exch1.myco.com,exch2.myco.com,exch3.myco.com ## ## EXCHANGE_SERVER_SECURE_MODE specifies whether to use HTTPS to contact Exchange servers. ## Value Operation ## 0 use HTTP ## 1 use HTTPS (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_SERVER_SECURE_MODE 0 ## ## EXCHANGE_SERVER_MODE specifies the protocol(s) to be used to contact Exchange servers. ## Value Operation ## 1 use WebDAV ## 2 use Exchange Web Services (EWS) ## 3 try EWS first, if that fails, try WebDAV (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later. ## SET EXCHANGE_SERVER_MODE 1 ## ## PROVIDE_EXCHANGE_CONTACTS specifies whether menu item(s) for Exchange Contacts are displayed. ## Value Operation ## 0 Not displayed ## 1 Displayed (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 through R2.4 only ## SET PROVIDE_EXCHANGE_CONTACTS 0 ## ## PROVIDE_EXCHANGE_CALENDAR specifies whether menu item(s) for Exchange Calendar are displayed. ## Value Operation ## 0 Not displayed ## 1 Displayed (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PROVIDE_EXCHANGE_CALENDAR 0 ## ## USE_EXCHANGE_CALENDAR specifies whether calendar data will be retrieved from Microsoft Exchange. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x only (set only by user option in R6.2 and later) ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET USE_EXCHANGE_CALENDAR 0 ## ## EXCHANGE_USER_DOMAIN specifies the domain for the URL ## used to obtain Exchange contacts and calendar data. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_USER_DOMAIN exchange.myco.com ## ## EXCHANGE_EMAIL_DOMAIN specifies the Exchange email domain. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_EMAIL_DOMAIN avaya.com ## ## ENABLE_EXCHANGE_REMINDER specifies whether or not Exchange reminders will be displayed. ## Value Operation ## 0 Not displayed (default) ## 1 Displayed ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET ENABLE_EXCHANGE_REMINDER 1 ## ## EXCHANGE_REMINDER_TIME specifies the number of minutes before an appointment ## at which a reminder will be displayed. ## Valid values are 0 through 60; the default value is 5. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_REMINDER_TIME 7 ## ## EXCHANGE_SNOOZE_TIME specifies the number of minutes after a reminder has been ## temporarily dismissed at which the reminder will be redisplayed. ## Valid values are 0 through 60; the default value is 5. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_SNOOZE_TIME 4 ## ## EXCHANGE_REMINDER_TONE specifies whether or not a tone will be generated ## the first time an Exchange reminder is displayed. ## Value Operation ## 0 Tone not generated ## 1 Tone generated (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## SET EXCHANGE_REMINDER_TONE 0 ## ## EXCHANGE_NOTIFY_SUBSCRIPTION_PERIOD specifies the number of seconds between re-syncs ## with the Exchange server. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later; valid values are 60 through 3600; the default value is 180. ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x; valid values are 0 through 3600; the default value is 180. ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later; valid values are 0 through 3600; the default value is 180. ## SET EXCHANGE_NOTIFY_SUBSCRIPTION_PERIOD 200 ## ############### CALENDAR SETTINGS ############### ## ## CALENDAR_PARTICIPANT_CODE_STRING specifies a list of semicolon separated values representing ## the phrase “participant code”. The string to be recognized by the Calendar application before ## the participant code appears for click to dial functionality. ## The default value is: participant;participant code;participant-code;code;pc ## The parameter is used with AVaya Aura Conferencing. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CALENDAR_PARTICIPANT_CODE_STRING participant;participant code;participant-code;code ## ## CALENDAR_HOST_CODE_STRING specifies a list of semicolon separated values representing the phrase ## “host code”. The string to be recognized by the Calendar application before the host code appears ## for click to dial functionality. ## The default value is: host;host code;host-code;hc ## The parameter is used with AVaya Aura Conferencing. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CALENDAR_HOST_CODE_STRING host;host code;host-code ## ## CALENDAR_MEETING_ID_STRING specifies a list of semicolon separated values representing the phrase ## “meetingid”. The string to be recognized by the Calendar application before the meeting id appears ## for click to dial functionality. ## The default value is: meeting;meeting id;meeting-id;mid;id ## The parameter is used with Avaya Scopia. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CALENDAR_MEETING_ID_STRING meeting;meeting id;meeting-id;mid ## ## CALENDAR_MEETING_PIN_STRING specifies a list of semicolon separated values representing the phrase ## “meeting pin”. The string to be recognized by the Calendar application before the meeting pin appears ## for click to dial functionality. ## The default value is: meeting pin;pin;meeting-pin ## The parameter is used with Avaya Scopia. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CALENDAR_MEETING_PIN_STRING meeting pin;pin ## ## CALENDAR_PHONE_NUM_MIN_DIGITS specifies the minimal number of digits required for the device to identify ## a number in the location or body of the message. ## The range is 4-21, where 4 is the default. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CALENDAR_PHONE_NUM_MIN_DIGITS 10 ## ################### OTHER SIP-ONLY SETTINGS ################ ## ## SPEAKERSTAT specifies the operation of the speakerphone. ## Value Operation ## 0 Speakerphone disabled ## 1 One-way speaker (also called "monitor") enabled ## 2 Full (two-way) speakerphone enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SPEAKERSTAT 1 ## ## MUTE_ON_REMOTE_OFF_HOOK controls the speakerphone muting for a remote-initiated ## (a shared control or OOD-REFER) speakerphone off-hook. ## ## Valid values are 0 and 1 ## 0 - the speakerphone is Unmuted ## 1 - the speakerphone is Muted ## ## The default value is 1 (Muted) for 96x1 SIP R6.3 ## The default value is 0 (Unmuted) for 96x1 SIP R6.3.1 and later, H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; R1.0.2 and later - this parameter is also supported in IPO environment where it is used ## to control auto answer calls whether they start muted (1) or not (0). ## ## The value of the parameter MUTE_ON_REMOTE_OFF_HOOK will be applied to the phone only when the phone is ## deployed with a CM 6.2.2 and earlier releases. ## ## If the phone is deployed with CM 6.3 or later, the MUTE_ON_REMOTE_OFF_HOOK variable is ignored and instead ## the feature is delivered via PPM by enabling the Turn on mute for remote off-hook attempt parameter in the station form ## via the Session Manager (System Manager) or Communication Manager (SAT) administrative interfaces. ## SET MUTE_ON_REMOTE_OFF_HOOK 0 ## ## SDPCAPNEG specifies whether or not SDP capability negotiation is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 SDP capability negotiation is disabled ## 1 SDP capability negotiation is enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6 and later ## SET SDPCAPNEG 0 ## ## ENFORCE_SIPS_URI specifies whether a SIPS URI must be used for SRTP. ## Value Operation ## 0 Not enforced ## 1 Enforced (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6 and later ## SET ENFORCE_SIPS_URI 1 ## ## 100REL_SUPPORT specifies whether the 100rel option tag is included in the SIP INVITE header field. ## Value Operation ## 0 The tag will not be included. ## 1 The tag will be included (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6 and later ## SET 100REL_SUPPORT 1 ## ## DISPLAY_NAME_NUMBER specifies whether the name and/or number will be displayed for ## incoming calls, and if both are displayed, the order in which they are displayed. ## Value Operation ## 0: display calling party name only ## 1: display calling party name followed by calling party number ## 2: display calling party number only ## 3: display calling party number followed by calling party name ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later; valid values 0 through 3; the default value is 0. ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x; valid values 0 through 1; the default value is 0. ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later; valid values 0 through 3; the default value is 0. ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 through R2.6.4; valid values 0 through 1; the default value is 0. SET DISPLAY_NAME_NUMBER 1 ## ## HOTLINE specifies zero or one hotline number. ## Valid values can contain up to 30 dialable characters (0-9, *, #). ## The default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET HOTLINE "" ## ## PLAY_TONE_UNTIL_RTP specifies whether locally-generated ringback tone will stop ## as soon as SDP is received for an early media session, or whether it will continue ## until RTP is actually received from the far-end party. ## Value Operation ## 0 Stop ringback tone as soon as SDP is received ## 1 Continue ringback tone until RTP is received (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET PLAY_TONE_UNTIL_RTP ## ## PLUS_ONE specifies whether pressing the 1 key during dialing will alternate between 1 and +. ## Value Operation ## 0 1 key only dials 1 (default). ## 1 1 key alternates between 1 and +. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET PLUS_ONE 1 ## ## TEAM_BUTTON_RING_TYPE specifies the alerting pattern to use for team buttons. ## Valid values are 1 through 8, the default value is 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET TEAM_BUTTON_RING_TYPE 3 ## ## SECURECALL specifies whether an icon will be displayed when SRTP is being used. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 up to R7.0.0 (excluded). The parameter has been obsoleted in 96x1 SIP R7.0.0. ## SET SECURECALL 1 ## ## LOCALLY_ENFORCE_PRIVACY_HEADER specifies whether the telephone will display ## "Restricted" (in the current language) instead of CallerId information when ## a Privacy header is received in a SIP INVITE message for an incoming call. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default): CallerID information will be displayed ## 1 Enabled: "Restricted" will be displayed ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET LOCALLY_ENFORCE_PRIVACY_HEADER 1 ## ## BRANDING_VOLUME specifies the volume level at which the Avaya audio brand is played. ## Value Operation ## 8 9db above nominal ## 7 6db above nominal ## 6 3db above nominal ## 5 nominal (default) ## 4 3db below nominal ## 3 6db below nominal ## 2 9db below nominal ## 1 12db below nominal ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET BRANDING_VOLUME 2 ## ## ENABLE_OOD_MSG_TLS_ONLY specifies whether an Out-Of-Dialog (OOD) REFER ## must be received over TLS transport to be accepted. ## Value Operation ## 0 No, TLS is not required ## 1 Yes, TLS is required (default) ## Note: A value of 0 is only intended for testing purposes. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_OOD_MSG_TLS_ONLY 1 ## ## PROVIDE_EDITED_DIALING specifies control for editied dialing for user. ## Value Operation ## 0 Dialing Options is not displayed. Edit dialing is disabled. ## The user cannot change edit dialing and the phone defaults to on-hook dialing. ## 1 Dialing Options is not displayed. On hook dialing is disabled. ## The user cannot change edit dialing and the phone defaults to edit dialing. ## 2 Dialing Options is displayed (default). ## The user can change edit dialing and the phone defaults to on-hook dialing. ## 3 Dialing Options is displayed. ## The user can change edit dialing and the phone defaults to edit dialing. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x only ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later PROVIDE_EDITED_DIALING 3 ## ## VU_MODE specifies visiting user mode capabilities. ## Value Operation ## 0 No visiting user support (default). ## 1 User is prompted at registration time as to whether or not they are visiting. ## 2 Only visiting user registrations are allowed. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x only ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 up to R2.6.13 (excluded). R2.6.13+ do not support SES. Visiting user feature is supported by SES only. ## SET VU_MODE 0 ## ## TEAM_BUTTON_REDIRECT_INDICATION controls if the redirection indication should be shown on ## a Team Button (on a monitoring station) in case it is not a redirect destination of the monitored station. ## Value Operation ## 0 - disabled; the redirect indication will be shown only on a monitoring station which is redirection destination (default). ## 1 - enabled; the redirection icon is displayed on all monitoring stations ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.4 and later SET TEAM_BUTTON_REDIRECT_INDICATION 1 ## ## ############ ACCESSIBILITY SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ############# ## ## PROVIDE_KEY_REPEAT_DELAY specifies how long a navigation button must be held down ## before it begins to auto-repeat, and whether an option will be provided by which ## the user can change this value. ## Value Operation ## 0 Default (500ms) with user option (default) ## 1 Short (250ms) with user option ## 2 Long (1000ms) with user option ## 3 Very Long (2000ms) with user option ## 4 No Repeat with user option ## 5 Default (500ms) without user option ## 6 Short (250ms) without user option ## 7 Long (1000ms) without user option ## 8 Very Long (2000ms) without user option ## 9 No Repeat without user option ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET PROVIDE_KEY_REPEAT_DELAY 2 ## ################### HANDSET EQUALIZATION ################### ## ## ADMIN_HSEQUAL specifies handset audio equalization standards compliance ## Note that this value will only have an effect on a telephone if the handset equalization ## has not been set by the user or by the HSEQUAL local procedure for that telephone. ## Value Operation ## 1 Use handset equalization that is compliant with TIA 810/920 (default) ## 2 Use handset equalization that is compliant with FCC Part 68 HAC requirements ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.4 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.7 and later ## SET ADMIN_HSEQUAL 2 ## ###################### HEADSET PROFILES #################### ## ## HEADSET_PROFILE_DEFAULT specifies the number of the default headset audio profile. ## Valid values are 1 through 20; the default value is 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET HEADSET_PROFILE_DEFAULT 1 ## ## HEADSET_PROFILE_NAMES specifies an ordered list of names to be displayed for headset audio profile selection. ## The list can contain 0 to 255 UTF-8 characters; the default value is null (""). ## Names are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## Two commas in succession indicate a null name, ## which means that the default name should be displayed for the corresponding profile. ## Names may contain spaces, but if any do, the entire list must be quoted. ## There is no way to prevent a profile from being displayed. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET HEADSET_PROFILE_NAMES "Acme Earwigs,,Spinco Ear Horns" ## ################ EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBER ################ ## ## PHNEMERGNUM specifies an emergency telephone number to be dialed if the associated button is selected. ## Valid values may contain up to 30 dialable characters (0-9, *, #); the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later; the parameter is supported when the phone is registered to Avaya Communication Manager only. ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.5 and later; the parameter is supported when the phone is registered to Avaya Communication Manager only. ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 4630 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (up to 16 digits only) ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PHNEMERGNUM 9911 ## ## PHNMOREEMERGNUMS specifies list of comma separated emergency numbers ## Valid values may contain up to 30 dialable characters (0-9, *, #); the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 and later ## SET PHNMOREEMERGNUMS "911,109,115" ## ############ EMERGENCY NUMBER SOFTKEY (SIP ONLY) ########### ## ## ENABLE_SHOW_EMERG_SK specifies whether an emergency softkey, ## with or without a confirmation screen, will be displayed when the phone is registered. ## All emergency numbers will always be supported. ## Value Operation ## 0 An emergency softkey will not be displayed. ## 1 An emergency softkey will be displayed, without a confirmation screen. ## 2 An emergency softkey will be displayed, with a confirmation screen (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET ENABLE_SHOW_EMERG_SK 1 ## ## ENABLE_SHOW_EMERG_SK_UNREG specifies whether an emergency softkey, ## with or without a confirmation screen, will be displayed when the phone is not registered. ## All emergency numbers will always be supported. ## Value Operation ## 0 An emergency softkey will not be displayed. ## 1 An emergency softkey will be displayed, without a confirmation screen. ## 2 An emergency softkey will be displayed, with a confirmation screen (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET ENABLE_SHOW_EMERG_SK_UNREG 1 ## ############## APPLICATION ACCESS SETTINGS ############### ## ## APPSTAT restricts access to certain applications. ## Value Operation ## 0 Call Log and Redial are suppressed and changes to Speed Dial/Contacts are not allowed ## 1 Call Log, Redial and Speed Dial/Contacts work without restrictions (default) ## 2 Call Log is suppressed, the Last-6-numbers Redial option is suppressed, ## and changes to Speed Dial/Contacts are not allowed ## 3 Changes to Speed Dial/Contacts are not allowed; other applications work without restrictions ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later SET APPSTAT 1 ## ################## OPTION ACCESS SETTINGS ################## ## ## OPSTAT restricts access to certain user options. ## Value Operation ## 000 user options are not accessible ## 001 user can only access the Log-Off Option. ## 010 user can only access view-only options, they cannot change any settings ## 011 user can only access view-only options and the Log-Off Option ## 100 user can access all options except the view-only options and the Log-Off option ## 101 user can access all options except the view-only options ## 110 user can access all the options except the Log-Off option ## 111 user can invoke any or all of the user options (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later SET OPSTAT 111 ## ## OPSTAT2 specifies whether customized labels from a backup file will be used ## even if the first digit of the value of OPSTAT is "0". ## Value Operation ## 0 Customized labels from a backup file will not be used (default) ## 1 Customized labels from a backup file will be used ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET OPSTAT2 1 ## ## SYSAUDIOPATH specifies whether the Audio Path option will be displayed ## for user selection or whether the audio path used for a server-initiated ## off-hook command will be determined by this parameter. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Audio Path option is displayed for user selection (default) ## 1 The audio path is set to Speaker ## 2 The audio path is set to Headset ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SYSAUDIOPATH 1 ## ################ PHONE SETTINGS (H.323 ONLY) ############### ## ## PHNSCRALL specifies whether separate screens will be displayed for call appearances and features. ## Value Operation ## 0 Separate screens will be displayed for call appearances and features (default) ## 1 A consolidated screen will be displayed that includes call appearances and features ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## SET PHNSCRALL 1 ## ## EOEDITDIAL specifies whether a # character will be inserted at the end of Edit Dialing strings. ## Value Operation ## 0 # will not be inserted ## 1 # will be inserted (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R3.2 and later ## SET EOEDITDIAL 0 ## ## FBONCASCREEN specifies whether features will be displayed on the same screen as call appearances ## when the value of PHNSCRALL is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 Features will not be displayed on the same screen as call appearances (default) ## 1 As many features as will fit will be displayed on the same screen as call appearances, ## in addition to being displayed on a separate feature screen. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later (9608, 9608G and 9611G models only) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later (9630 and 9640 models only) SET FBONCASCREEN 0 ## ## PHNSCRIDLE specifies the content displayed in Main Display Area when the phone is in Idle state. ## Value Operation ## 0 Dial Pad Window is displayed (Default) ## 1 Call Appearance Window is displayed. ## This parameter is supported by: ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET PHNSCRIDLE 1 ## ## PHNSCRCOLUMNS specifies whether the Phone Screen is presented with ## one (full-width) or two (each half-width) columns. ## This parameter is relevant only for 9608, 9608G and 9611G phones only. ## Note: The field "Phone Screen Width" in HOME-> Options & Settings -> Screen & Sound Options menu allows ## also users to change the way phone screen is presented as described above. PHNSCRCOLUMNS will be enforced only if ## user did not change at all the field "Phone Screen Width" value. Please note that user changes are stored in backup/restore ## file as "Phone Screen Width" field (if BRURI has a valid value) which means that if the restored file include "Phone Screen Width" parameter then it ## will take precedence over PHNSCRCOLUMNS. If BRURI is not valid, but user still change the content of "Phone Screen Width" field, then ## user value will take precedence over PHNSCRCOLUMNS (The only way to clear user configuration in this case is by doing "CLEAR" operation in CRAFT menu). ## Value Operation ## 0 call appearance and feature button occupies the entire width of the Line (default) ## 1 call appearance and feature button occupies half the width of the Line ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later SET PHNSCRCOLUMNS 1 ## ## CADISPMODE specifies whether to keep the display of the call appearance label in call state idle mode as it is ## without dependency on call state (ringing, dialing, etc) and whether to add prefix or suffix in order ## to identify the bridge/line number. The parameter is supported with Avaya Communication Manager only. ## Value Operation ## 0 Labels are changed according to call state where Avaya Communication Manager provides the labels. ## This is the behavior in pre 6.6 releases. This is the default value. ## 1 The idle call label is presented independent on call states. In addition, “a.” through “z.” lowercase (and then “A.”-“Z.") are added ## as prefix in full width screen or as a suffix on the right column and a prefix on the left column in half width screen. ## “a.” through “z.” are added to bridged and line appearances according to the bridged/line button order. ## 2 The idle call label is presented independent on call states as in 1, but without addition of “a.” through “z.” lowercase (and then “A.”-“Z.") strings. ## If personalized label is configured for line/bridged appearance then it will be used instead of the idle call label assigned by Avaya Communication Manager. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET CADISPMODE 1 ## ## CALLAPPRSELMODE controls highlight of call appearance when there is incoming call. ## Value Operation ## 0 When there is incoming call, the call appearance of incoming call is highlighted and applicable softkeys ## are presented for incoming call (“Answer”, “Ignore” if no other call exists or “Ans Hold”, “Ans Drop”, ## “Ignore” if another call exists). This is the behavior in pre 6.6 releases. This is the default value. ## 1 When there is incoming call, the highlight remains on the active/hold call appearance and therefore ## presenting the softkeys for the active/hold call (and not for the incoming call). ## CALLAPPRSELMODE is supported when the phone is registered to Avaya Communication Manager only. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET CALLAPPRSELMODE 1 ## ## HIDEDTMFDIGITS - defines if the DTMF digits will be displayed when they are entered. ## Value Operation ## 0 DTMF digits will be displayed when entered (default) ## 1 DTMF digits will not be displayed when entered; they will be replaced by '*' ## This parameter is supported by: ## B189 H.323 R1.0 SP1 and later ## SET HIDEDTMFDIGITS 1 ## ##################### CALL LOG SETTINGS #################### ## ## CLDISPCONTENT specifies whether the name, the number, or both will be displayed for Call Log entries. ## Value Operation ## 0 Both the name and the number will be displayed ## 1 Only the name will be displayed (default) ## 2 Only the number will be displayed ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and up to R6.6.3 (excluded) (only supports values of 0 or 1) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.3 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later (only supports values of 0 or 1) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.2 and later ## SET CLDISPCONTENT 0 ## ## LOG_DIALED_DIGITS specifies if the call log will contain digits dialed by a user or ## information about a remote party in case where the user dialed a FAC code. ## The FAC code is identified by * or # entered as a first character. ## ## Value Operation ## 0 Allow dialed FAC code to be replaced with a remote party number in the call History ## 1 Dialed digits are logged in call History exactly as they were entered by the user (default). ## ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.5 and later ## ## SET LOG_DIALED_DIGITS 0 ## ############## CALL LOG SETTINGS (H.323 ONLY) ############## ## ## CLDELCALLBK specifies whether a Call Log entry will be deleted when a callback is initiated ## by pressing the Call softkey from the entry's Details screen. ## Value Operation ## 0 Entries will not be deleted when a callback in initiated (default) ## 1 Entries will be deleted when a callback in initiated ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later ## SET CLDELCALLBK 1 ## ## LOGMISSEDONCE specifies whether Call Log will display more than one ## missed Call Log entry from the same caller. ## Value Operation ## 0 Multiple Call Log entries will be displayed per caller (default) ## 1 Only one missed Call Log entry will be displayed per caller ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later ## SET LOGMISSEDONCE 1 ## ## LOGUNSEEN specifies whether incoming calls that did not cause alerting will be logged ## as missed calls (e.g., calls that are forwarded because the phone is busy). ## Value Operation ## 0 Unseen calls will not be logged (default) ## 1 Unseen calls will be logged ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later SET LOGUNSEEN 0 ## ## LOGBACKUP specifies whether Call Log entries will be backed up to, ## and restored from, the backup/restore file. ## Value Operation ## 0 Call Log entries will not be backed up and restored ## 1 Call Log entries will be backed up and restored (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later ## SET LOGBACKUP 0 ## ## CLBACKUPTIMESTAT specifies whether Call Log entries will be backed up only after ## a minimum interval as specified by the value of CLBACKUPTIME. ## Note that this parameter only has an effect if the value of LOGBACKUP is 1. ## Value Operation ## 0 Call Log entries will be backed up as they are created (default) ## 1 Call Log entries will be backed up after the interval specified by CLBACKUPTIME ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.3 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.3 and later ## SET CLBACKUPTIMESTAT 1 ## ## CLBACKUPTIME specifies the minimum interval, in minutes, between backups of the Call Log, ## if the values of LOGBACKUP and CLBACKUPTIMESTAT are both 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.3 and later; Valid values are 10 through 60; the default value is 15. ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.3 and later; Valid values are 1 through 60; the default value is 15. ## SET CLBACKUPTIME 20 ## ## CALL_LOG_JOURNAL specifies whether retrieving calls while offline feature is supported. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## SET CALL_LOG_JOURNAL 1 ## ############## RING TONE SETTING (H.323 ONLY) ############ ## ## DEFAULTRING specifies the default ring tone. ## Valid values are 1 through 14; the default value is 9. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## SET DEFAULTRING 12 ## ################ TIMER SETTING (H.323 ONLY) ############## ## ## TIMERSTAT specifies whether Timer On and Timer Off softkeys will be presented to the user. ## Value Operation ## 0 Timer On and Timer Off softkeys will not be presented to the user (default) ## 1 Timer On and Timer Off softkeys will be presented to the user ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET TIMERSTAT 1 ## ####################### USB SETTINGS ####################### ## ## Please note that USB mass storage device is supported when the phone is registered ## to Avaya Communication Manager only. ## ## USBPOWER controls when power is provided to the USB interface. ## Value Operation ## 0 Turn off USB power regardless of power source. ## 1 Turn on USB power only if Aux powered. ## 2 Turn on USB power regardless of power source (default). ## 3 Turn on USB power if Aux powered or PoE Class 3 power. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## SET USBPOWER 0 ## ## USBLOGINSTAT specifies whether the USB Login/Logout feature is enabled ## Value Operation ## 0 USB Login/Logout feature is disabled. ## 1 USB Login/Logout feature is enabled (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.0 and later ## SET USBLOGINSTAT 1 ## ########### BLUETOOTH SETTINGS ############## ## ## BLUETOOTHSTAT specifies whether the user is given an option to enable Bluetooth. ## Value Operation ## 0 Bluetooth is disabled and the user is not given an option to enable it ## 1 The user is given an option to enable Bluetooth (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP 7.0.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET BLUETOOTHSTAT 0 ## ########### DECT SETTINGS ############## ## ## DECTSTAT specifies whether the user is given an option to enable DECT. DECT is used ## for cordless handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 DECT is disabled and the user is not given an option to enable it ## 1 The user is given an option to enable DECT (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DECTSTAT 0 ## ########### WI-FI SETTINGS ############## ## ## WIFISTAT specifies whether the user is given an option to enable Wi-Fi. ## Value Operation ## 0 Wi-Fi is disabled and the user is not given an option to enable it ## 1 The user is given an option to enable Wi-Fi (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET WIFISTAT 0 ## ########### Headset Signaling ############## ## ## HEADSETBIDIR specifies whether bidirectional signaling ## on the headset interface will be enabled or disabled. ## This parameter shall only be used in case of using wireless headset and the base station is connected to headset jack of the phone. In all other cases (such as use of wired headset), ## the parameter shall remain with the default value "Disabled". ## Note: The user has an option to change the value of this parameter through UI (96x1 H.323 - "Headset Signaling..." field in HOME-> Options & Settings -> Call Settings", ## H175 SIP - "Headset Signaling..." field in Settings application -> Call Settings"). This parameter is backup/restore to file server if BRURI is valid (96x1 H.323) or PPM (H175 SIP). ## In case of 96x1 H.323 the parameter precedence is according to the last source (which means backup/restore value has higher precedence compare to the 46xxsettings.txt file). If BRURI ## is invalid then the value from the settings file will be used. ## In case of H175 SIP, the value configured in the 46xxsettings.txt file will be used as initial configuration in case no such parameter is stored in PPM in Aura ## Environment. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Switchhook and alerting signaling are both enabled ## 2 Only switchhook signaling is enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later (values 0-2) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.1 and later (values 0-1) ## Note that 96x1 H.323 R6.2 only supported signaling for alerting. ## SET HEADSETBIDIR 1 ## ########## AUTO-ANSWER SETTINGS (H.323 ONLY) ############# ## ## AUTOANSSTAT specifies the operation of the local auto-answer capability. ## Value Operation ## 0 Auto-answer is disabled (default). ## 1 Auto-answer is always enabled. ## 2 Auto-answer is enabled if the incoming call is on a primary call appearance. ## 3 Auto-answer is always enabled if the user is logged into a call center. ## 4 Auto-answer is enabled if the user is logged into a call center ## and if the incoming call is on a primary call appearance. ## Note: Auto-answer also depends on the value of AUTOANSSTRING (see below). ## Also, if the call server is administered to provide auto-answer capability, ## the call server administration will take precedence over AUTOANSSTAT. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.2 and later ## SET AUTOANSSTAT 1 ## ## AUTOANSSTRING specifies a substring that must appear in the call-associated ## display message for an incoming call if that call is to be auto-answered. ## If the value of AUTOANSSTRING is null, no substring is required. ## The value can contain 0 to 15 characters; the default value is null (""). ## Note: Auto-answer also depends on the value of AUTOANSSTAT (see above). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.2 and later ## SET AUTOANSSTRING ## ## AUTOANSALERT specifies whether the telephone will audibly alert for auto-answered calls. ## Value Operation ## 0 Auto-answered calls will not alert (default). ## 1 Auto-answered calls will alert. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.2 and later ## SET AUTOANSALERT 1 ## ################### CALL CENTER SETTINGS ################# ## ## HEADSYS specifies whether the telephone will go on-hook if the headset is active ## when a Disconnect message is received. ## Value Operation ## 0 The telephone will go on-hook if a Disconnect message is received when the headset is active ## 1 Disconnect messages are ignored when the headset is active ## Note: a value of 2 has the same effect as a value of 0, and ## a value of 3 has the same effect as a value of 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.1 and later (the default value is 0 unless the value ## of CALLCTRSTAT is set to 1, in which case the default value is 1) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and R6.2 ignore this parameter, and will ignore Disconnect messages ## if the user is logged in as a call center agent. If the user is not logged in ## as a call center agent, the telephone will go on-hook if a Disconnect message ## is received when the headset is active. ## 96x1 H.323 releases prior to R6.1 (the default value is 1) ## 96x1 SIP R6.4 and later (the default value is 0) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later up to R6.4 (not included) (the default value is 1) ## 96x0 H.323 R1.2 and later (the default value is 1) ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later (the default value is 1) ## 16xx H.323 R1.3 and later (the default value is 1) ## SET HEADSYS 0 ## ########## CALL CENTER SETTINGS (96x1 SIP ONLY) ############ ## ## SKILLSCREENTIME specifies the duration, in seconds, that the Skills screen will be displayed. ## Valid values are 0 through 60; the default value is 5. ## A value of 0 means that the Skills screen will not be removed automatically when the agent logs in. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET SKILLSCREENTIME 5 ## ## UUIDISPLAYTIME specifies the duration, in seconds, that the UUI Information screen will be displayed. ## Valid values are 5 through 60; the default value is 10. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET UUIDISPLAYTIME 10 ## ## ENTRYNAME specifies whether the Calling Party Name or the VDN/Skill Name will be used in History entries. ## Value Operation ## 0 Calling Party Name will be used (default) ## 1 VDN/Skill Name will be used ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET ENTRYNAME 1 ## ## BUTTON_MAPPINGS specifies a list of Button=Status pairs that change the operation ## of some of the buttons on the telephone. ## Button=Status pairs are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## Valid Button values are "Forward", "Speaker", "Hookswitch", and "Headset". ## Valid Status values are "na" and "cc-release". ## Value Operation ## na The corresponding button will be disabled. ## cc-release The button will invoke the cc-release feature. ## If the value of BUTTON_MAPPINGS is null (the default), all buttons will operate normally. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET BUTTON_MAPPINGS Forward=na,Speaker=cc-release,Hookswitch=na,Headset=na ## ## CC_INFO_TIMER specifies the duration, in hours, of the subscription to the SIP CC-Info event package. ## Valid values are 1 through 24; the default value is 8. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET CC_INFO_TIMER 8 ## ########## CALL CENTER SETTINGS (96x1 H.323 ONLY) ########## ## ## CALLCTRSTAT specifies whether Call Center features will be enabled or disabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Call Center features will be disabled (default) ## 1 Call Center features will be enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET CALLCTRSTAT 1 ## ## OPSTATCC specifies whether Call Center options such as Greetings will be presented ## to the user even if the value of OPSTAT is set to disable user options. ## Note that the value of CALLCTRSTAT must be 1 for OPSTATCC to be used. ## Value Operation ## 0 Call Center options will be displayed based on the value of OPSTAT (default) ## 1 Call Center options will be displayed based on the value of OPSTATCC ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET OPSTATCC 1 ## ## AGTACTIVESK specifies which softkeys will be displayed for active call center calls ## Value Operation ## 0 Softkeys will be displayed in the default order, depending on administered features (default) ## 1 The positions of the Release and Transfer softkeys will be interchanged, otherwise the same as 0 ## 2 The Release softkey will not be displayed, otherwise the same as 0 ## 3 The soft keys will be labeled as an active call in a non-call center environment from left to right: Hold, Conf, Transfer, Drop. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.1 and later (values 0-2); value 3 is added in 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later. ## SET AGTACTIVESK 2 ## ## AGTCALLINFOSTAT specifies whether the caller-information line will be displayed. ## Value Operation ## 0 The caller-information line will not be displayed ## 1 The caller-information line will be displayed (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTCALLINFOSTAT 0 ## ## AGTFWDBTNSTAT specifies whether the Forward button will be disabled for call center agents. ## Note that the value of CALLCTRSTAT must be 1 for AGTFWDBTNSTAT to be used. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Forward button will operate normally ## 1 The Forward button will be disabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTFWDBTNSTAT 0 ## ## AGTGREETINGSTAT specifies whether or not an agent greeting may be created, modified, played and deleted. ## Note that the value of CALLCTRSTAT must be 1 for AGTGREETINGSTAT to be used. ## Value Operation ## 0 Agent greetings will be disabled ## 1 Agent greetings will be enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTGREETINGSTAT 0 ## ## AGTGREETLOGOUTDEL specifies whether agent greetings will be deleted when the agent logs out ## Value Operation ## 0 Agent greetings will not be deleted when the agent logs out ## 1 Agent greetings will be deleted when the agent logs out (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.1 and later ## SET AGTGREETLOGOUTDEL 0 ## ## AGTVUSTATID specifies the Vu-stat format number for Agent ID determination. ## Valid values are 0 through 50; the default value is 0. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## SET AGTVUSTATID 33 ## ## AGTLOGINFAC specifies the Feature Access Code to be used for logging in Call Center agents. ## Valid values are 1 to 4 dialable characters (0-9, * and #); the default value is "#94". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTLOGINFAC #33 ## ## AGTLOGOUTFAC specifies the Feature Access Code to be used for logging out Call Center agents. ## Valid values are 1 to 4 dialable characters (0-9, * and #); the default value is "#95". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTLOGOUTFAC #34 ## ## AGTSPKRSTAT specifies how the Speaker button functions for call center agents. ## by default (if AGTSPKRSTAT is configured to 1) the Speaker button, will function ## normally unless CALLCTRSTAT is 1 and a call center agent is logged in. In ## latter case it will be disabled (not function at all). ## Value Operation ## 0 The Speaker button functions normally ## 1 The Speaker button will be disabled (default) ## This value only applies if the following conditions are also met: ## the value of CALLCTRSTAT is 1 and a call center agent is logged in. ## 2 The Speaker button functions as a Release button ## This value only applies if the following conditions are also met: ## the value of CALLCTRSTAT is 1, a call center agent is logged in, ## the telephone is a 9641 and has a Release button administered ## (otherwise the default behavior will apply). ## 3 The Speaker button functions as a Release button ## This value only applies if the following conditions are also met: ## the value of CALLCTRSTAT is 1, a call center agent is logged in and ## the telephone has a Release button administered. ## (otherwise the default behavior will apply). ## 4 The Speaker button functions as a Release button ## This value only applies if the following condition is also met: ## the telephone has a Release button administered. ## (otherwise the default behavior will apply). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later (values 0-4) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later (values 0-2) ## SET AGTSPKRSTAT 0 ## ## AGTTIMESTAT specifies whether the date and time will be displayed on the top line for call center agents. ## Note that the value of CALLCTRSTAT must be 1 for AGTTIMESTAT to be used. ## Value Operation ## 0 The date and time will be displayed normally ## 1 The display of the date and time will be disabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTTIMESTAT 0 ## ## AGTTRANSLTO specifies the text string used by the call server as a translation of the English ## string "to" in call-associated display messages. This string is used by the telephone when ## parsing received display messages to decide whether to play an agent greeting. ## Valid values are 1 to 6 UTF-8 characters; the default value is "to". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTTRANSLTO to ## ## AGTTRANSLCLBK specifies the text string used by the call server as a translation of the English ## string "callback" in call-associated display messages. This string is used by the telephone ## when parsing received display messages to decide whether to play an agent greeting. ## Valid values are 1 to 10 UTF-8 characters; the default value is "callback". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTTRANSLCLBK callback ## ## AGTTRANSLPRI specifies the text string used by the call server as a translation of the English ## string "priority" in call-associated display messages. This string is used by the telephone ## when parsing received display messages to decide whether to play an agent greeting. ## Valid values are 1 to 8 UTF-8 characters; the default value is "priority". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTTRANSLPRI priority ## ## AGTTRANSLPK specifies the text string used by the call server as a translation of the English ## string "park" in call-associated display messages. This string is used by the telephone ## when parsing received display messages to decide whether to play an agent greeting. ## Valid values are 1 to 6 UTF-8 characters; the default value is "park". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTTRANSLPK park ## ## AGTTRANSLICOM specifies the text string used by the call server as a translation of the English ## string "ICOM" in call-associated display messages. This string is used by the telephone ## when parsing received display messages to decide whether to play an agent greeting. ## Valid values are 1 to 6 UTF-8 characters; the default value is "ICOM". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET AGTTRANSLICOM ICOM ## ## CCLOGOUTIDLESTAT specifies whether the Headset audio path and LED ## will be turned off or left on when a call center agent logs out, ## if the agent is not on a call. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Headset audio path and LED will be turned off (default) ## 1 The Headset audio path and LED will be left on if they are already on ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET CCLOGOUTIDLESTAT 1 ## ## LOCALZIPTONEATT specifies the attenuation of zip tone level. ## The possible values are in the range of 0-95 dB. ## The default value is 35 dB. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET LOCALZIPTONEATT 35 ## ## AGENTGREETINGSDELAY specifies the time in milisecconds between call ## autoanswer and playing of agent greeting. ## The default is 700 ms and valid values are 0 - 3000 ms ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## SET AGENTGREETINGSDELAY 1000 ## ## AGTCAINFOLINE controls presentation of call associated information in the agent information line ## when the phone is in half width screen mode. ## Value Operation ## 0 the Agent Information Line presents agent-oriented information only ## 1 the Agent Information Line presents agent-oriented information as well ## to call associated information (as supported in pre 6.6 release) (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET AGTCAINFOLINE 0 ## ########## RECORDING TONE SETTINGS (96x1 H.323 and SIP ONLY) ####### ## ## RECORDINGTONE specifies whether Call Recording Tone will be generated on active calls. ## Value Operation ## 0 Call Recording Tone will not be generated (default) ## 1 Call Recording Tone will be generated ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET RECORDINGTONE 1 ## ## RECORDINGTONE_INTERVAL specifies the number of seconds between Call Recording Tones. ## Valid values are 1 through 60; the default value is 15. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET RECORDINGTONE_INTERVAL 10 ## ## RECORDINGTONE_VOLUME specifies the volume of the Call Recording Tone in 5dB steps. ## Value Operation ## 0 The tone volume is equal to the transmit audio level (default) ## 1 The tone volume is 45dB below the transmit audio level ## 2 The tone volume is 40dB below the transmit audio level ## 3 The tone volume is 35dB below the transmit audio level ## 4 The tone volume is 30dB below the transmit audio level ## 5 The tone volume is 25dB below the transmit audio level ## 6 The tone volume is 20dB below the transmit audio level ## 7 The tone volume is 15dB below the transmit audio level ## 8 The tone volume is 10dB below the transmit audio level ## 9 The tone volume is 5dB below the transmit audio level ## 10 The tone volume is equal to the transmit audio level ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET RECORDINGTONE_VOLUME 8 ## ########## CALL CENTER SETTINGS (16xx and 96x1 H.323) ########## ## ## Note: The below parameters are supported by 96x1 H.323 for Call Center Agent registered to ## Avaya Communication Manager. ## ## CCBTNSTAT specifies whether the values of ## CONFSTAT, DROPSTAT, HEADSTAT, HOLDSTAT, HOOKSTAT, MUTESTAT, and XFERSTAT ## are used for enabling and disabling the buttons associated with those parameters. ## Value Operation ## 0 The telephone uses the values of those parameters (default for 16xx) ## 1 The telephone ignores the values those parameters (default for 96x1) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET CCBTNSTAT 1 ## ## CONFSTAT specifies whether the Conference button is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Conference button is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default for 16xx) ## 1 The Conference button is enabled (default for 96x1) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET CONFSTAT 1 ## ## DROPSTAT specifies whether the Drop button is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Drop button is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default for 16xx) ## 1 The Drop button is enabled (default for 96x1) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET DROPSTAT 1 ## ## HEADSTAT specifies whether the Headset button is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## It is ignored by telephones that do not have a Headset button. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Headset button is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default) ## 1 The Headset button is enabled. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET HEADSTAT 1 ## ## HOLDSTAT specifies whether the Hold button is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Hold button is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default for 16xx) ## 1 The Hold button is enabled (default for 96x1) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET HOLDSTAT 1 ## ## HOOKSTAT specifies whether the switchhook is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 The switchhook is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default) ## 1 The switchhook is enabled. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET HOOKSTAT 1 ## ## MUTESTAT specifies whether the Mute button is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Mute button is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default) ## 1 The Mute button is enabled. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET MUTESTAT 1 ## ## XFERSTAT specifies whether the Transfer button is enabled or disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Transfer button is disabled when CCBTNSTAT is 0 (default for 16xx) ## 1 The Transfer button is enabled (default for 96x1) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.3.3 and later ## SET XFERSTAT 1 ## ################## TRUSTED CERTIFICATES AND GENERAL CERTIFICATES SETTINGS ################## ## ## TRUSTCERTS specifies a list of names of files that contain copies of CA certificates ## (in PEM format) that will be downloaded, saved in non-volatile memory, ## and used by the telephone to authenticate received identity certificates. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters. ## Values are separated by commas without intervening spaces. ## The default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.9 and later ## 3631 H.323 R1.0 and later ## ## SET TRUSTCERTS av_prca_pem_2033.txt,av_sipca_pem_2027.txt,av_csca_pem_2032.txt SET TRUSTCERTS SystemManagerCA.cacert.pem,AAATrustROOT.pem,RootCA_Sectigo.cer ## Note: The above is list of Avaya trusted certificates. You shall only use ## the ones that are required for your setup. ## Note: 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later supports also intermediate certificates download for cases ## where servers do not provided the full certificate chain up to the root CA. There is no support ## for certificate signature validation up to intermediate certificate. Certificate signature validation ## is always supported up to the root CA. ## ## TLSSRVRID specifies whether a certificate will be trusted only if the ## identity of the device from which it is received matches the certificate, ## per Section 3.1 of RFC 2818. ## Value Operation ## 0 Identity matching is not performed ## 1 Identity matching is performed (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; Supported by SIP/PPM and file downloads. ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## TLSSRVRID is not supported by 96x1 H.323 phones and instead ## TLSSRVRVERIFYID is supported (see below) SET TLSSRVRID 0 ## ## TLSSRVRVERIFYID Specifies whether the identity of a TLS server is checked against its certificate. ## This parameter obsoletes TLSSRVRID for 96x1 H.323 phones. ## 0 Identity of a TLS server is NOT checked against its certificate (default). ## 1 Identity of a TLS server is checked against its certificate. The validation of server identity ## is applicable for IPSec VPN with certificate based authentication (using NVSGIP) , Backup/restore over ## HTTPS (using BRURI), HTTPS file server (using TLSSRVR), WML browser (using WMLHOME), ## H.323 over TLS signaling (using MCIPADD). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later SET TLSSRVRVERIFYID 0 ## ## SERVER_CERT_RECHECK_HOURS specifies the number of hours after which certificate expiration ## and OCSP will be used (if OCSP is enabled) to recheck the revocation and expiration status ## of the certificates that were used to establish a TLS connection. ## SERVER_CERT_RECHECK_HOURS is applicable for H.323 over TLS signaling only in 96x1 H.323 R6.6. ## Valid values are: 0-32767. A value of 0 means that periodic checks will not be done. ## The default is 24. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET SERVER_CERT_RECHECK_HOURS 30 ## ## CERT_WARNING_DAYS specifies how many days before the expiration of a certificate that a warning ## should first appear on the phone screen. This includes trusted certificates, OCSP certificates and identity certificate. ## Log and syslog message will be generated as well. The warning will reappear every 7 days. ## Valid values are: 0-99 (60 is default), where 0 means no certificate expiration warning will be generated. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET CERT_WARNING_DAYS 30 ## ################## TLS SETTINGS ################## ## ## TLS_SECURE_RENEG Specifies whether a TLS session will be terminated if the peer does not support secure renegotiation. ## Value Operation ## 0 TLS secure renegotiation is not required from peer (Default) ## 1 TLS secure renegotiation is required from peer ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET TLS_SECURE_RENEG 1 ## ## TLS_VERSION controls TLS version used for all TLS connections (except SLA monitor agent) ## Value Operation ## 0 TLS versions 1.0 and 1.2 are supported (default). ## 1 TLS version 1.2 only is permitted. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.1.0 and later releases ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.2 and later releases ## B189 H.323 R6.6.2 and later releases ## SET TLS_VERSION 1 ## ################ HTTP PROXY SERVER SETTINGS ############## ## ## HTTPPROXY specifies the address of the HTTP proxy server used by SIP ## telephones to access an SCEP server that is not on the enterprise network. ## Zero or one IP address in dotted decimal or DNS name format, ## optionally followed by a colon and a TCP port number. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; HTTPPROXY is NOT supported for SCEP, but for WEB Browser and Exchange. ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## Note that in H.323 telephones, SCEP uses WMLPROXY. ## SET HTTPPROXY proxy.mycompany.com ## ## HTTPEXCEPTIONDOMAINS specifies a list of one or more domains, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces, ## for which HTTPPROXY will not be used. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; HTTPEXCEPTIONDOMAINS is NOT supported for SCEP, but for WEB Browser and Exchange. ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## Note that in H.323 telephones, SCEP uses WMLEXCEPT. ## SET HTTPEXCEPTIONDOMAINS mycompany.com ## ################ CAPTIVE PORTAL SETTINGS ############## ## ## CAPTIVE_PORTAL_SERVER specifies the URL of the captive portal server. ## Android supports a detection mechanism of whether the device is behind captive portal which requires HTTP authentication ## in order to access the Internet. The mechanism is based on sending HTTP requests to http://clients3.google.com/generate_204. ## If HTTP response 204 is returned with null content then the device assumes that it is correctly connected to the Internet, ## else captive portal is assumed. There may be customers who block access to the Internet (or to certain Internet pages) ## and for these customers the detection mechanism will notice that the device is not connected to the Internet and raise notification. ## For these customers, the CAPTIVE_PORTAL_SERVER parameter shall be configured to “” (default). “” (null string) implies that the detection mechanism is disabled. ## There may be other customers that want to have their own captive portal server. These customers can configure their own HTTP server. ## As long their HTTP server does NOT return 204 with null content then the device will assume it behind captive portal ## and redirect the user to the relevant HTTP authentication page. As the default of CAPTIVE_PORTAL_SERVER is null, ## then customers may need to do staging of the device and set CAPTIVE_PORTAL_SERVER to the relevant captive portal server ## in the settings file before deploying the device in the field (mainly for cases where captive portal prevent download of ## configuration files in the field) OR configure CAPTIVE_PORTAL_SERVER in the local DHCP server deployed in the field. ## Captive portal is supported over both Wi-Fi and Ethernet interfaces. ## Zero or one URL in the following format: ## [http://]hostname[:port][/path] ## [https://]hostname[:port][/path] ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET CAPTIVE_PORTAL_SERVER http://clients3.google.com/generate_204 ## ###################### SCEP SETTINGS ##################### ## ## MYCERTURL specifies the URL of the SCEP server from which ## the telephone should obtain an identity certificate, ## if it does not already have one from that server. ## Zero to 255 ASCII characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MYCERTURL http://certsrvr.trustus.com/mscep/mscep.dll ## ## MYCERTCN specifies the Common Name (CN) used in the SUBJECT of an SCEP ## certificate request. The value must be a string that contains either ## "$SERIALNO" (which will be replaced by the telephone's serial number) or ## "$MACADDR" (which will be replaced by the telephone's MAC address), ## but it may contain other characters as well, including spaces. ## Eight ("$MACADDR") to 255 characters; the default value is "$SERIALNO". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## Note that prior to R2.6.8, 96x0 SIP releases only support ## "$MACADDR" or "$SERIALNO" as a value, not additional characters. ## SET MYCERTCN "Avaya telephone with MAC address $MACADDR" ## ## MYCERTDN specifies the part the SUBJECT of an SCEP certificate request ## that is common for all telephones. It must begin with a "/" and may ## include Organizational Unit, Organization, Location, State and Country. ## Zero to 255 ASCII characters; the default value is null (""). ## Note: It is recommended that "/" be used as a separator between components. ## Commas have been found to not work with some servers. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MYCERTDN /C=US/ST=NJ/L=MyTown/O=MyCompany ## ## MYCERTCAID specifies an identifier for the CA certificate with which ## the SCEP certificate request is to be be signed, if the server hosts ## multiple Certificate Authorities. ## Zero to 255 ASCII characters; the default value is "CAIdentifier". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MYCERTCAID EjbSubCA ## ## MYCERTKEYLEN specifies the bit length of the public and private keys ## generated for the SCEP certificate request. ## 4 ASCII numeric digits, "1024" through "2048"; the default value is "1024". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later; default value is “2048” in 96x1 SIP R6.5+. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; default value is “2048” in H1xx SIP R1.0.1+. ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MYCERTKEYLEN 1024 ## ## MYCERTRENEW specifies the percentage of the identity certificate's ## Validity interval after which renewal procedures will be initiated. ## Valid values are 1 through 99; the default value is 90. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MYCERTRENEW 90 ## ## MYCERTWAIT specifies the telephone's behavior if the SCEP server ## indicates that the certificate request is pending manual approval. ## Value Operation ## 0 Poll the SCEP server periodically in the background ## 1 Wait until a certificate is received or the request is rejected (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MYCERTWAIT 1 ## ## SCEPPASSWORD specifies the password to be included (if not null) ## in the challengePassword attribute of an SCEP certificate request. ## Values may contain 0 to 32 ASCII characters (50 ASCII characters in 96x1/B189 H.323 6.6 and later); ## the default value is "$SERIALNO". ## If the value contains "$SERIALNO", it will be replaced by the telephone's serial number. ## If the value contains "$MACADDR", it will be replaced by the telephone's MAC address in hex. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## Note that to maintain the security of the password, this parameter should ## not be set in a file that is accessible on an enterprise network, ## it should only be set in a restricted staging configuration. ## SET SCEPPASSWORD $SERIALNO ## ## MYCERTKEYUSAGE specifies the purpose(s) for which a certificate is issued. ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters. List of text strings, separated by commas without any intervening spaces, ## that will be compared to the values specified for the X.509 KeyUsage extension ## and for each matching value, the corresponding bit will be set in the SCEP PKCSReq; ## Invalid strings will be ignored; Possible values are: "digitalSignature", "nonRepudiation", ## "keyEncipherment", "dataEncipherment", "keyAgreement", "keyCertSign", ## "cRLSign", "encipherOnly", "decipherOnly". The default is null string (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET MYCERTKEYUSAGE digitalSignature, keyEncipherment ## ###################### PKCS12 SETTINGS ##################### ## ## PKCS12URL specifies the URL to be used to download a PKCS #12 file ## containing an identity certificate and its private key. ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters, zero or one URL. The value can be a string that contains either ## "$SERIALNO" (which will be replaced by the telephone's serial number) or "$MACADDR" ## (which will be replaced by the telephone's MAC address), but it may contain other characters as well. ## If $MACADDR is added to the URL then the PKCS12 filename on the file server shall include MAC address ## without colons (i.e., 6 pairs of ASCII hexadecimal characters AABBCCDDEEFF with hex characters A-F ## encoded as upper-case characters). For example, if Ethernet MAC address of a specific phone ## is: 00-24-D7-E4-2E-98 and the PKCS12URL is: http://pkc12file_$MACADDR.cer, then the filename of the ## PKCS12 file for this phone on the file server shall be: pkc12file_0024D7E42E98.cer. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET PKCS12URL http://pkc12file_$MACADDR.cer ## ##################### 802.1X SETTINGS #################### ## ## DOT1XSTAT specifies the 802.1X Supplicant operating mode. ## Value Operation ## 0 Supplicant disabled (default, unless indicated otherwise below) ## 1 Supplicant enabled, but responds only to received unicast EAPOL messages ## 2 Supplicant enabled; responds to received unicast and multicast EAPOL messages ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later (default was 1 prior to R2.4.1) ## 46xx H.323 R2.9 and later (default was 1) ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DOT1XSTAT 1 ## ## DOT1X specifies the 802.1X pass-through operating mode. ## Pass-through is the forwarding of EAPOL frames between the telephone's ## Ethernet line interface and its secondary (PC) Ethernet interface ## Value Operation ## 0 EAPOL multicast pass-through enabled without proxy logoff (default) ## 1 EAPOL multicast pass-through enabled with proxy logoff ## 2 EAPOL multicast pass-through disabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.9 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## Note: In 96x0 H.323 releases 1.0 through 1.5, and in 46xx H.323 releases 2.6 through 2.8, ## DOT1X is supported, but it controls both Supplicant and pass-through operation. ## In these releases, operation is as follows: ## Value Operation ## 0 Unicast Supplicant and multicast pass-through enabled without proxy logoff (default) ## 1 Unicast Supplicant and multicast pass-through enabled with proxy logoff ## 2 Unicast or multicast Supplicant operation enabled, without pass-through ## SET DOT1X 1 ## ## DOT1XEAPS specifies the authentication method to be used by 802.1X. ## Valid values are "MD5" (the default) and "TLS". ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.1 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET DOT1XEAPS MD5 ## ## DOT1XWAIT specifies whether the telephone will wait for ## 802.1X to complete before proceeding with startup. ## Value Operation ## 0 Does not wait for 802.1X to complete (default) ## 1 Waits for 802.1X to complete ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.2.2 and later ## SET DOT1XWAIT 1 ## ################ FIPS SETTINGS ########################### ## ## FIPS_ENABLED specifies whether only FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms will be supported. ## Value Operation ## 0 No restriction on using non FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms (default) ## 1 Use only FIPS-approved cryptographic algorithms using embedded FIPS 140-2-validated cryptographic module (Per NIST Certificate #1747, ## for the exact operational environment used by the endpoint please refer to the Avaya support team). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET FIPS_ENABLED 1 ## ################ OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) SETTINGS ########################### ## ## OCSP_ENABLED specifies whether OCSP will be used to check revocation status of certificates. ## Value Operation ## 0 OCSP is disabled (default) ## 1 OCSP is enabled. OCSP will be used to check revocation status for the certificates ## presented by peers for any TLS connection (H.323 signaling over TLS, HTTPS, ## 802.1x with EAP-TLS, SLA Mon agent, IPSec VPN, SSO) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET OCSP_ENABLED 1 ## ## OCSP_ACCEPT_UNK specifies whether in cases where certificate revocation status for a specific certificate ## cannot be determined to bypass certificate revocation operation for this certificate. ## Value Operation ## 0 Certificate is considered to be revoked if the certificate revocation status is unknown. TLS connection ## will be closed. ## 1 Certificate revocation operation will accept certificates for which the certificate revocation ## status is unknown (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET OCSP_ACCEPT_UNK 1 ## ## OCSP_NONCE specifies whether a nonce will be included in OCSP requests and expected in OCSP responses. ## Value Operation ## 0 Nonce is NOT added to OCSP packets ## 1 Nonce is added to OCSP packets (Default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET OCSP_NONCE 1 ## ## OCSP_URI specifies the URI of an OCSP responder. The URI can be an IP address or hostname. ## The default is "". 0 to 255 ASCII characters - zero or one URI. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET OCSP_URI http://clients1.google.com/ocsp ## ## OCSP_URI_PREF specifies the preferred URI to use for OCSP requests if more than one is available. ## Value Operation ## 1 Use the OCSP_URI first and then the OCSP field of the Authority Information Access (AIA) extension ## of the certificate being checked (Default) ## 2 Use the OCSP field of the Authority Information Access (AIA) extension of the ## certificate being checked first and then OCSP_URI ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET OCSP_URI_PREF 0 ## ## OCSP_TRUSTCERTS specifies list of OCSP trusted certificates which are used as ## OCSP signing authority for the certificate that its revocation status is being checked. ## This is needed in case the OCSP responder uses a different CA than the root CA of the certificate that ## its revocation status is being checked. ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters: zero or more file names or URLs, separated by commas without any intervening spaces ## The default is "". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET OCSP_TRUSTCERTS ocsp.cer ## ################ PUSH INTERFACE SETTINGS ################# ## ## TPSLIST (Trusted Push Server List) specifies a list of URI authority components ## (optionally including scheme and path components) to be trusted. ## A URI received in a Push Request will only be used to obtain Push content ## if it matches one of these values. The list can contain up to 255 characters. ## Values are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## If the value of TPSLIST is null (the default), Push will be disabled. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.1 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.2, R2.5 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET TPSLIST 135.20.21.20,push.avaya.com,http://135.20.21.33:80,http://apps.avaya.com/push ## ## SUBSCRIBELIST specifies a list of URIs to which the telephone will send a Subscribe ## message (an HTTP GET for the URI with the telephone's MAC address, extension number, ## IP address and model number appended as query values) after the telephone successfully ## registers with a call server, or when a "subscribe" Push Request is received with ## a type attribute of "all". The list can contain up to 255 characters. ## Values are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## If the value of SUBSCRIBELIST is null (the default), Subscribe messages will not be sent ## after registration or in response to a Push Request with a type attribute of "all". ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.1 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.2, R2.5 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET SUBSCRIBELIST http://135.20.21.21/subscribe,http://push.avaya.com/clients ## ## PUSHCAP allows the modes of individual Push types supported by the telephone to be controlled. ## The value is a 3, 4 or 5 digit number, of which each digit controls a Push type and can have a ## value of 0, 1 or 2. A digit of 0 means that all Push requests will be rejected for that push type. ## A digit of 1 means that only Push requests with a mode of "barge" will be accepted for that push type. ## A digit of 2 means that Push requests with a mode of "barge" or "normal" will be accepted for that push type. ## The Push types controlled by each digit are as follows: ## 11111 ## ||||+- The rightmost digit controls top line Push requests. ## |||+-- The next digit to the left controls display (WML browser) Push requests. ## ||+--- The next digit to the left controls receive audio Push requests. ## |+---- The next digit to the left controls transmit audio Push requests. ## +----- The next digit to the left controls phonexml Push requests. ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later support 3 and 4-digit values (default is 2222). ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later support 4-digit values (default is 0000). ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x support 4-digit values (default is 0000) ## but not display Push, so valid values are 0000 through 2202. ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later support 3 and 4-digit values (default is 2222). ## 96x0 SIP R2.2, R2.5 and later support 5-digit values (default is 00000). ## 46xx H.323 R2.6 and later support 3-digit values (default is 222). ## although R6.0.1 only supports top line, audio (transmit and receive) and subscribe push types. ## SET PUSHCAP 2222 ## ## PUSHPORT specifies the TCP port number to be used by the HTTP server in the telephone for Push. ## Valid values are 80 through 65535; the default value is 80 ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.1 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.2, R2.5 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.6 and later ## SET PUSHPORT 80 ## ################# WML BROWSER SETTINGS ################### ## ## Note that if WMLHOME and WMLIDLEURI are set here, the web pages that they specify ## will be used by all telephones that support these parameters. ## If it is desired to use web pages that are customized to the display capabilities ## of a specific telephone model, the parameter should be set in the model-specific ## section for that telephone model located near the end of this file. ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.71 and later ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLPROXY specifies zero or one address for an HTTP proxy server that will be used by the ## WML browser, and by the Weather and World Clock applications on the 9621, 9641 and 9670. ## The address can be in dotted-decimal (IPv4), or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.71 and later ## SET WMLPROXY proxy.company.com ## ## WMLPORT specifies the TCP port number of the HTTP proxy server specified by WMLPROXY. ## Valid values are 0 through 65535. ## The default value for H.323 software is 8000. ## The default value for SIP software is 8080. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.71 and later ## SET WMLPORT 9000 ## ## WMLEXCEPT specifies zero or more IP addresses or domains for which ## the HTTP proxy server specified by WMLPROXY will not be used. ## The values are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.71 and later ## SET WMLEXCEPT mycompany.com,135.20.21.20 ## ## WMLHELPSTAT specifies whether a web application help item will be displayed on the ## Home screen if no WML applications are administered and if the value of WMLHOME is null. ## Value Operation ## 0 A web application help item will not be displayed ## 1 A web application help item will be displayed (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later. ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET WMLHELPSTAT 0 ## ################# IDLE TIMER SETTINGS #################### ## ## BAKLIGHTOFF specifies the number of minutes of idle time after which the display backlight will be turned off. ## Phones with gray-scale displays do not completely turn backlight off, they set it to the lowest non-off level. ## Valid values are 0 through 999; the default value is 120 (2 hours). ## A value of 0 means that the display backlight will not be turned off automatically when the phone is idle. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.5, R2.7 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later SET BAKLIGHTOFF 60 ## ## HOMEIDLETIME specifies the number of minutes of idle time after which the Home screen will be displayed. ## A value of 0 means that the Home screen will not be displayed automatically when the phone is idle. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 9621 and 9641 H.323 R6.0 and later (valid values are 0 through 30; the default value is 10) ## 9621 and 9641 SIP R6.0 and later (valid values are 0 through 30; the default value is 10) ## 9670 H.323 R2.0 and later (valid values are 5 through 30; the default value is 10) ## SET HOMEIDLETIME 5 ## ## SCREENSAVERON specifies the number of minutes of idle time after which the screen saver will be displayed. ## If an image file has been downloaded based on the SCREENSAVER (H.323) or LOGOS and CURRENT_LOGO (for SIP) ## parameter, it will be used as the screen saver. ## Otherwise, the built-in Avaya one-X(TM) screen saver will be used. ## Valid values are 0 through 999; the default value is 240 (4 hours). ## A value of 0 means that the screen saver will not be displayed automatically when the phone is idle. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later, but not supported by the 9610 ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later SET SCREENSAVERON 120 ## ## SCREENSAVER specifies the filename of a JPEG image to be used as a customized screen saver. ## Valid values are 0 through 32 ASCII characters; the default value is null (""). ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later, but not supported by the 9610 ## SET SCREENSAVER filename ## ## SCREENSAVERURL specifies the URL content presented in screen saver mode. ## Zero to 255 ASCII characters; the default value is null (""). ## In case the SCREENSAVERURL parameter is configured and it includes a valid URL address, H1xx should display ## this URL when the H1xx is in screen saver mode. The URL can contain link to web pages and also to Video files. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET SCREENSAVERURL http://www.xyz.com/H1xxScreenSaver/ ## ## WMLIDLETIME specifies the number of minutes of idle time after which ## the web page specified by the value of WMLIDLEURI will be displayed. ## If WMLIDLEURI is null, a web page will not be displayed when the phone is idle. ## On the 9610, WMLIDLETIME specifies the number of minutes of idle time after which the ## idle application (configured by IDLEAPP in the 9610 backup/restore file) will be displayed. ## Valid values are 1 through 999; the default value is 10. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.7 and later ## SET WMLIDLETIME 60 ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later, but not supported by the 9610 ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.7 and later ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############# PHONE LOCK SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ############# ## ## ENABLE_PHONE_LOCK specifies whether a softkey (on the idle Phone screen) and ## a feature button will be displayed to allow the user to manually lock the phone. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled: Lock softkey and feature button will not be displayed (default) ## 1 Enabled: Lock softkey and feature button will be displayed ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later, Please note that ENABLE_PHONE_LOCK is used on H1xx as enable/disable ## of lock screen. ## SET ENABLE_PHONE_LOCK 1 ## ## PHONE_LOCK_IDLETIME specifies the interval of idle time, in minutes, after which ## the phone will automatically lock if the value of ENABLE_PHONE_LOCK is 1. ## A value of 0 means that the phone will not lock automatically. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later; valid values are 0 through 10080; the default value is 0. ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x; valid values are 0 through 999; the default value is 0. ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later; valid values are 0 through 999; the default value is 0. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; valid values are 1 through 10080; the default value is 60. Please note PHONE_LOCK_IDLETIME ## specifies the maximum interval of idle time, in minutes, allowed for user configuration (unless exchange policy enforces lower number). ## User can choose smaller value than this value in the settings application. By default, user choice is 5 minutes. ## SET PHONE_LOCK_IDLETIME 30 ## ## PHONE_LOCK_PASSWORD_FAILED_ATTEMPTS specifies the number of failed attempts ## before the the device is lockout. The range is 0, 5-20. If 0, then no limit on number of failed attempts. ## Otherwise, it defines the number of failed attempts. The default value is 8. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; ## SET PHONE_LOCK_PASSWORD_FAILED_ATTEMPTS 10 ## ## LOCKSCREENURL specifies the URL content presented in lock screen mode. ## Zero to 255 ASCII characters; the default value is null (""). ## In case the LOCKSCREENURL parameter is configured and it includes a valid URL and in case the H1xx is registered ## to the SIP Controller and it is locked, then content of this URL shall be presented. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET LOCKSCREENURL http://www.xyz.com/H1xxlock/ ## ############ CODEC AND RTP SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ########### ## ## ENABLE_G711A specifies whether the G.711 a-law codec is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_G711A 0 ## ## ENABLE_G711U specifies whether the G.711 mu-law codec is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_G711U 0 ## ## ENABLE_G722 specifies whether the G.722 codec is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later; the default value is 1. ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x; the default value is 0. ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later; the default value is 0. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; the default value is 1. ## SET ENABLE_G722 1 ## ## ENABLE_G726 specifies whether the G.726 codec is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default for 96x0 R1.0) ## 1 Enabled (default for all other releases and models) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; For IP office environment this parameter shall be set to 0 as G.726 is not supported by IP Office. ## SET ENABLE_G726 0 ## ## G726_PAYLOAD_TYPE specifies the RTP payload type to be used for the G.726 codec. ## Valid values are 96 through 127; the default value is 110. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET G726_PAYLOAD_TYPE 111 ## ## ENABLE_G729 specifies whether the G.729A codec is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled without Annex B support (default) ## 2 Enabled with Annex B support ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_G729 0 ## ## SEND_DTMF_TYPE specifies whether DTMF tones are sent in-band (as regular audio), ## or out-of-band (using RFC 2833 procedures). ## Value Operation ## 1 in-band ## 2 out-of-band (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SEND_DTMF_TYPE 1 ## ## DTMF_PAYLOAD_TYPE specifies the RTP payload type to be used for RFC 2833 signaling. ## Valid values are 96 through 127; the default value is 120. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DTMF_PAYLOAD_TYPE 121 ## ## SYMMETRIC_RTP specifies whether or not the telephone should discard ## received RTP/SRTP datagrams if their UDP Source Port number is not ## the same as the UDP Destination Port number that the telephone is ## including in RTP/SRTP datagrams intended for that endpoint. ## Value Operation ## 0 Ignore the UDP Source Port number in received RTP/SRTP datagrams. ## 1 Discard received RTP/SRTP datagrams if their UDP Source Port number ## does not match the UDP Destination Port number that the telephone is ## including in RTP/SRTP datagrams intended for that endpoint (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.4 and later ## SET SYMMETRIC_RTP 0 ## ############ VIDEO SETTINGS ########### ## ## ENABLE_VIDEO specifies whether video is enabled or disabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later SET ENABLE_VIDEO 1 ## ## VIDEO_H264_PROFILE specifies the maximal profile level that can be used by the device. ## Value Operation ## 66 Baseline profile ## 100 High profile and Baseline profile (Default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VIDEO_H264_PROFILE 66 ## ## VIDEO_PAYLOAD_LENGTH specifies the video packets payload length (bytes) ## Valid values are 0, 1200 through 1460; where 0 means that the video packets payload length is calculated ## according to MTU_SIZE parameter. If MTU_SIZE is 1500 bytes then video payload length will be: ## 1460 == 1500 Bytes (Ethernet) - 20 (IP) - 8 (UDP) - 12 (RTP). In similar way if MTU_SIZE is 1496 bytes ## then video payload length will be: 1456. ## The default value is 0. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VIDEO_PAYLOAD_LENGTH 1460 ## ## PINHOLE_KEEPALIVE_INTERVAL specifies the maximal time in seconds between consecutive video RTP packets. ## Valid values are 0-60; where 0 means no RTP keepalives; 1-60 refers to keepalive interval in seconds. ## The default is 15 seconds. ## If the timer expires the device will send out RTP packet with PT=0 and no payload in order to keep ## NAT/Firewall pinhole open. The use case is when video is MUTE and the device is behind NAT/firewall device. ## Keepalives are sent on video RTP ports only (not video RTCP). Audio RTP packets are kept sending even if there is audio MUTE. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PINHOLE_KEEPALIVE_INTERVAL 60 ## ## ENABLE_FIR specifies whether key frame requests are supported using RTCP FIR (Full Intra Requests ## according to RFC 5104). ## Value Operation ## 0 RTCP FIR is not SDP negotiated with remote peer ## 1 RTCP FIR is SDP negotiated with remote peer (default). Only if both peers support ## RTCP FIR, then RTCP FIR messages will be generated and received. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_FIR 0 ## ## ENABLE_PLI specifies whether key frame requests are supported using RTCP PLI (Picture Loss Indication ## according to RFC 4585). ## Value Operation ## 0 RTCP PLI is not SDP negotiated with remote peer ## 1 RTCP PLI is SDP negotiated with remote peer (default). Only if both peers support ## RTCP PLI, then RTCP PLI messages will be generated and received. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_PLI 0 ## ## ENABLE_TMMBR specifies whether TMMBR (Temporary Maximum Media Stream Bit Rate Requests) RTCP requests ## (according to RFC 5104) are sent to remote peer for bit rate adaptation and whether the device ## responds to TMMBR RTCP requests received. ## Value Operation ## 0 RTCP TMMBR is not SDP negotiated with remote peer ## 1 RTCP TMMBR is SDP negotiated with remote peer (default). Only if both peers support ## RTCP TMMBR, then RTCP TMMBR messages will be generated and received. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_TMMBR 0 ## ## DYNAMIC_VIDEO_SIZE_REQUEST specifies whether the device notifies the other side that the local video window ## size has been changed so it can change the transmitted video accordingly. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 TMMBR - the notification will be done by changing the incoming video bandwidth ## request using RTCP TMMBR (default) ## The parameter is only applicable if ENABLE_TMMBR is set to 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DYNAMIC_VIDEO_SIZE_REQUEST 0 ## ## DYNAMIC_VIDEO_SIZE_REQUEST_DELAY specifies the amount of time (in seconds) the device will wait before ## asking the remote party to reduce resolution to match a newly selected video window size. ## The range is 1-600. The default value is 20 seconds. ## The parameter is only applicable if ENABLE_TMMBR and DYNAMIC_VIDEO_SIZE_REQUEST are set to 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DYNAMIC_VIDEO_SIZE_REQUEST_DELAY 60 ## ## VIDEO_MAX_RX_RESOLUTION specifies the maximum video resolution that the device will request from the other side. ## Value Operation ## 4 480p ## 5 720p (1280 x 720) ## 6 1080p (1920x1080), Default ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VIDEO_MAX_RX_RESOLUTION 5 ## ## VIDEO_MAX_TX_RESOLUTION specifies the maximum video resolution that the device encodes and sends. ## This value is enforced locally without signaling to the remote party. ## Value Operation ## 1 180p (320 x 180) ## 2 240p ## 3 360p (640 x 360) ## 4 480p ## 5 720p (1280 x 720) ## 6 1080p (1920x1080), Default ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VIDEO_MAX_TX_RESOLUTION 5 ## ## VIDEO_MAX_RX_BANDWIDTH specifies the overall SDP requested bandwidth for Video RTP ## including IP and UDP overheads (but not Ethernet). The range is 80-4300 kbps. ## The default value is 4300 kbps. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VIDEO_MAX_RX_BANDWIDTH 1000 ## ## VIDEO_MAX_TX_BANDWIDTH specifies the overall bandwidth consumed by transmitted RTP for video ## including IP and UDP overheads (but not Ethernet). The range is 80-4300 kbps. ## The default value is 2500 kbps. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET VIDEO_MAX_TX_BANDWIDTH 1000 ## ## VIDEO_CALL_DISPLAY_MODE specifies whether video call will be presented automatically on external screen or on H175 built-in screen. ## Value Operation ## 0 When a video call is established (no matter whether user initiate a video call, escalate from audio to video call or answer a video call), ## present the video on H175 Built in screen. ## 1 When a video call is established (no matter whether user initiate a video call, escalate from audio to video call or answer a video call), ## present the video on H175 external screen ONLY if H175 is connected to external screen, else H175 built-in screen will be used (default). ## Note: This parameter is also stored/retrieved to/from PPM. Configuration of this parameter using the settings file is useful for initial ## configuration case only where such value is not stored yet in PPM. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET VIDEO_CALL_DISPLAY_MODE 0 ## ############ CAMERA SETTINGS ########### ## ## CAMERA_ANTIFLICKER_POWERLINE_FRQ specifies the frequency in Hz of the electrical power lines. ## The camera anti-flicker filter cancels artifacts caused by Florescent lights resonating ## at the power-line frequency. The power-line frequency is dependent on where the phone is deployed, ## and is either 50Hz or 60Hz. The automatic mode means that anti-flicker frequency is adjusted ## automatically according to the COUNTRY settings file parameter (60Hz when COUNTRY is undefined). ## Value Operation ## 0 Auto (default) ## 1 50 Hz ## 2 60 Hz ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET CAMERA_ANTIFLICKER_POWERLINE_FRQ 60 ## ############ EXTERNAL MONITOR SETTINGS ########### ## ## ENFORCE_DVI specifies whether DVI is enforced when PC display passes through H175. ## Value Operation ## 0 When PC display passes through H175, DVI is NOT enforced. As a result, the external monitor EDID information provided by H175 ## to the PC will contain both HDMI and DVI resolutions. HDMI resolutions in the EDID are limited to 720p. ## 1 When PC display passes through H175, DVI is enforced (Default). As a result, the external monitor EDID information provided to ## the PC will only contain DVI resolutions. This should be the preferred operating mode so that output video resolutions generated by H175 ## are not limited to HDMI 720p. In this mode the resulting video output signal will set to the DVI format. ## Note: This parameter has no affect when either the PC video output or external monitor connected to H175 are DVI. ## Note: This parameter has no affect when H175 is not connected to a PC video output. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.0.1 and later ## SET ENFORCE_DVI 0 ## ## CLONE_DISPLAY specifies whether clone internal display to external monitor ## Value Operation ## 0 HDMI Pass through, PC screen is pass through the device (default) ## 1 H175 internal display is clone to the external monitor ## Note: This parameter is also stored/retrieved to/from PPM. Configuration of this parameter using the settings file is useful for initial ## configuration case only where such value is not stored yet in PPM. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET CLONE_DISPLAY 1 ## ################## OTHER SIP-ONLY SETTINGS ################# ## ## PHNMUTEALERT_BLOCK specifies whether the Mute Alert feature will be Blocked or Unblocked. ## Value Operation ## 0 Unblocked ## 1 Blocked (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.1 and later. ## SET PHNMUTEALERT_BLOCK 1 ## ## MATCHTYPE specifies how a calling party number is compared to the numbers ## in the user's Contacts to obtain a name to display for the incoming call. ## Value Operation ## 0 The Contact name is displayed if the rightmost 4 digits of the calling ## party number match the rightmost 4 digits of a Contacts number (default) ## 1 The Contact name is displayed if the entire calling party number ## exactly matches the all of the digits in a Contacts number ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later. ## SET MATCHTYPE 0 ## ## ENABLE_HOLD_BUTTON specifies whether a Hold softkey will be displayed during an active call. ## Value Operation ## 0 A Hold softkey will not be displayed ## 1 A Hold softkey will be displayed (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP R2.6.7 and later ## SET ENABLE_HOLD_BUTTON 0 ## ## USE_QUAD_ZEROES_FOR_HOLD specifies how Hold will be signaled in SDP. ## Value Operation ## 0 "a=directional attributes" will be used (default) ## 1 "c=0.0.0.0" will be used ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## SET USE_QUAD_ZEROES_FOR_HOLD 1 ## ###################### SIG SETTING ###################### ## ## SIG specifies the type of software to be used by the telephone by ## controlling which upgrade file is requested after a power-up or a reset. ## Value Operation ## 0 Download the upgrade file for the same signaling protocol ## that is supported by the current software (default) ## 1 Download 96x1Hupgrade.txt (for H.323 software) ## 2 Download 96x1Supgrade.txt (for SIP software) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## SET SIG 0 ## ############### ETHERNET INTERFACE SETTINGS ################ ## ## PHY1STAT specifies the speed and duplex settings for the Ethernet line interface. ## Valid values are 1 through 6; the default value is 1. ## Value Operation ## 1 auto-negotiate ## 2 10Mbps half-duplex ## 3 10Mbps full-duplex ## 4 100Mbps half-duplex ## 5 100Mbps full-duplex ## 6 1Gbps full-duplex if supported by hardware, otherwise auto-negotiate ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (values 1-5 only) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later (values 1-5 only) ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.8 and later (values 1-5 only) ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later (values 1-5 only) ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PHY1STAT 1 ## ## PHY2STAT specifies the speed and duplex settings for the secondary (PC) Ethernet interface. ## Valid values are 0 through 6; the default value is 1. ## Value Operation ## 0 disabled ## 1 auto-negotiate ## 2 10Mbps half-duplex ## 3 10Mbps full-duplex ## 4 100Mbps half-duplex ## 5 100Mbps full-duplex ## 6 1Gbps full-duplex if supported by hardware, otherwise auto-negotiate ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (values 0-5 only) ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later (values 0-5 only) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.8 and later (values 0-5 only) ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later (values 0-5 only) ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET PHY2STAT 1 ## ## PHY2_AUTOMDIX_ENABLED specifies whether auto-MDIX is enabled on PHY2. ## Valid values are 0 through 1; the default value is 1. ## Value Operation ## 0 auto-MDIX is disabled ## 1 auto-MDIX is enabled (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## SET PHY2_AUTOMDIX_ENABLED 1 ## ############### POWER OVER ETHERNET SETTINGS ################ ## ## ASSUME_SP_POE specifies whether Single port PoE injector is connected to Video Collaboration Station. ## Value Operation ## 0 single port PoE injector is not connected to the Video Collaboration Station.(default) ## 1 single port PoE injector is connected to the Video Collaboration Station. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ASSUME_SP_POE 1 ## ## SP_POE_POWER specifies how much power is provided when Video Collaboration Station is connected to Single port PoE injector. ## The range is 15-26 watts where 20 is the default. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SP_POE_POWER 21 ## ############# LOCAL PROCEDURE ACCESS SETTINGS ############ ## ## PROCSTAT specifies whether local (craft) procedures can be used to configure the telephone. ## Value Operation ## 0 Local procedures can be used (default) ## 1 Local procedures cannot be used ## Note: Be very careful before setting PROCSTAT to 1 ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## 1692 H.323 R1.4 and later ## SET PROCSTAT 1 ## ## PROCPSWD specifies an access code for access to local (craft) procedures. ## Valid values contain 0 through 7 ASCII numeric digits. ## The default value is 27238 (CRAFT) unless indicated otherwise below. ## A null value implies that an access code is not required for access. ## Note: Setting this parameter via CM (for H.323) or PPM (for SIP) is more secure ## because this file can usually be accessed and read by anyone on the network. ## Setting the value in this file is intended primarily for configurations with ## versions of telephone or server software that do not support setting this ## value from the server. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later (must contain at least 4 digits for R6.2.4 and later, ## else default value 27238 is used) ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later (must contain at least 4 digits for R6.3 and later ## else default value 27238 is used) ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (must contain at least 4 digits else default value ## 27238 is used) ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later (must contain at least 4 digits for R1.0 and later ## else default value 27238 is used) ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later (default is null ("") prior to R1.2, must contain at ## least 4 digits for R3.2.1 and later else default value ## 27238 is used) ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later (must contain at least 4 digits for R2.6.10 and later ## else default value 27238 is used) ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later (default is null ("")) ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later (default is null ("")) ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later (default is null ("") prior to R1.3.3, and ## must contain at least 4 digits for R1.3.3 and later) ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## 1692 H.323 R1.4 and later ## SET PROCPSWD 572958 ## ## MUTECRAFTOPTIONS specifies whether CRAFT options can be invoked when pressing MUTE button in case of ## off-hook idle state (I.e. the telephone must have all call appearances in either In-Use or Idle call states ## and switchhook is off-hook) or MUTE button applies to the audio stream. ## Value Operation ## 0 CRAFT options can be invoked when pressing MUTE button in case of off-hook idle state (default) ## 1 MUTE button applies to the audio stream when pressing MUTE button in case of off-hook idle state ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## SET MUTECRAFTOPTIONS 1 ## ##################### SNMP SETTINGS ###################### ## ## SNMPSTRING specifies a security string that must be included in SNMP query messages ## for the query to be processed. ## Valid values contain 0 through 32 ASCII alphanumeric characters. ## The default value is null ("") unless indicated otherwise below. ## A null value results in SNMP being disabled. ## Note: Setting this parameter via CM (for H.323) or PPM (for SIP) is more secure ## because this file can usually be accessed and read by anyone on the network. ## Setting the value in this file is intended primarily for configurations with ## older versions of telephone, CM or PPM software that do not support setting ## this value from the server. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later (default is "public" prior to R2.6) ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later (default is "public") ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SNMPSTRING mystring ## ## SNMPADD specifies a list of source IP addresses from which SNMP query messages ## will be accepted and processed. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal (IPv4), colon-hex (IPv6, if supported), or ## DNS name format, separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SNMPADD 192.168.0.22,192.168.0.23 ## ####### LINK LAYER DISCOVERY PROTOCOL (LLDP) SETTINGS ###### ## ## LLDP_ENABLED specifies whether LLDP is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled ## 2 Enabled, but only begin transmitting if an LLDP frame is received (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; the default is 1. ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## Note that the following do NOT support the LLDP_ENABLED parameter, ## but they always operate consistent with a value of 2 above: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.2 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.2 and later ## SET LLDP_ENABLED 1 ## ## LLDP_XMIT_SECS specifies the rate in seconds at which LLDP messages will be transmitted. ## Valid values are 1 through 3600; the default value is 30. ## The primary intent of this parameter is to allow an SSO application to discover ## the telephone faster, since SSO uses LLDP for discovery, but this parameter ## controls the LLDP transmission rate on both Ethernet interfaces. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LLDP_XMIT_SECS 10 ## ######## SYNCHRONIZED STATE OPERATION (SSO) SETTINGS ####### ## ## SSO_ENABLED specifies whether SSO will be enabled or disabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SSO_ENABLED 1 ## ## SSO_REGISTERED_MODE specifies what the telephone does if it receives a ## registration request from an SSO application when it already registered. ## Value Operation ## 1 Accept the request if the provided credentials match the credentials ## that were used to establish the existing registration, otherwise, ## unregister and attempt to register using the new credentials (default) ## 2 Accept the request only if the provided credentials match the credentials ## that were used to establish the existing registration ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SSO_REGISTERED_MODE 2 ## ## SSO_LOCK_SYNC specifies whether the telephone will attempt to lock and unlock its ## user interface if it receives a request to lock or unlock from the SSO application. ## Value Operation ## 0 Ignores SSO requests to lock and unlock ## 1 Attempts to lock and unlock based on SSO requests (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SSO_LOCK_SYNC 0 ## ## SSO_DISCONNECT_ACTION specifies what the telephone does if the link to the PC drops ## while an SSO connection is active ## Value Operation ## 1 Unregisters after invoking each FAC specified by SSO_DISCONNECT_FACS (default) ## 2 Locks the user interface ## 3 No action is taken ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SSO_DISCONNECT_ACTION 2 ## ## SSO_DISCONNECT_FACS specifies a list of Feature Access Codes (FACs) to be invoked ## as determined by the value of SSO_DISCONNECT_ACTION above. ## FACs are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SSO_FACS *69,*35,*22 ## ## SSO_CLIENT_CERT specifies whether the telephone will request a client ## identity certificate during the TLS handshake for an SSO connection. ## Value Operation ## 0 A client certificate will not be requested (default) ## 1 A client certificate will be requested and authenticated ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET SSO_CLIENT_CERT 1 ## ################## EVENT LOGGING SETTINGS ################## ## ## SYSLOG_ENABLED enable or disable sending Syslog messages. ## Value Operation ## 0 Sending Syslog messages is disabled (default) ## 1 Sending Syslog messages is enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SYSLOG_ENABLED 1 ## ## LOGSRVR specifies one address for a syslog server ## in dotted-decimal (IPv4), colon-hex (IPv6, if supported), or DNS name format. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later (dotted-decimal values only) ## 46xx H.323 R1.7 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET LOGSRVR 192.168.0.15 ## ## Note that different parameters are used to specify the severity levels of events ## logged for H.323 vs. SIP, with different default values, as described below. ## ## SYSLOG_LEVEL specifies the severity level of syslog messages. ## Events with the selected severity level and above will be logged ## (note that lower numeric severity values correspond to higher severity levels). ## Value Operation ## 3 Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 4 Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged (Default) ## 5 Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 6 Informational, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 7 Debug, Informational, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SYSLOG_LEVEL 4 ## ## LOCAL_LOGS_ENABLED enable or disable local logging storage. ## Value Operation ## 0 Local logging is disabled ## 1 Local logging is enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET LOCAL_LOGS_ENABLED 0 ## ## LOGLOCAL specifies the severity levels of events logged in the ## endptRecentLog, endptResetLog and endptStartupLog objects in the SNMP MIB. ## Events with the selected severity level and above will be logged ## (note that lower numeric severity values correspond to higher severity levels). ## Value Operation ## 0 Logging to the MIB is disabled ## 1 Emergency events are logged ## 2 Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 3 Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 4 Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 5 Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 6 Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 7 Informational, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged (default) ## 8 Debug, Informational, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## Warning: A setting of 8 can impact the performance of the telephone due to the number of events generated. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R1.7 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LOGLOCAL 5 ## ## LOCAL_LOG_LEVEL specifies the severity levels of events logged in the ## endptRecentLog, endptResetLog and endptStartupLog objects in the SNMP MIB. ## Events with the selected severity level and above will be logged ## (note that lower numeric severity values correspond to higher severity levels). ## Value Operation ## 0 Emergency events are logged ## 1 Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 2 Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 3 Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged (default) ## 4 Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 5 Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 6 Informational, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## 7 Debug, Informational, Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency events are logged ## Warning: A setting of 7 can impact the performance of the telephone due to the number of events generated. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 1603 SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; No SNMP support in R1.0. This parameter affects local log files stored on the device. ## SET LOCAL_LOG_LEVEL 3 ## ## LOG_CATEGORY specifies a list of categories of events to be logged via syslog and locally. ## This parameter must be specified to log events below the Error level. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters. The default is "". ## Category names are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## See Administrator's guide for additional detail. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; the default is "ALL" which implies all categories. New categories for H1xx compare to ## 96x1 SIP: “ANDROID” and “KERNEL". ## SET LOG_CATEGORY DHCP,NETMGR,AUDIO ## ######### DEBUGGING SETTINGS (96x1 H.323 only) ########### ## ## LOGTOFILE specifies whether logging of optional debug messages ## to an internal file will be enabled or disabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2.3 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LOGTOFILE 1 ## ################### AUDIO DEBUG RECORDING ################## ## ## ENABLE_RECORDING specifies whether audio debug recording is enabled for users. ## Value Operation ## 0 Audio debug recording is disabled (default) ## 1 Audio debug recording is enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET ENABLE_RECORDING 1 ## ## WARNING_FILE specifies the file name or URL for a custom single-channel WAV file ## coded in ITU-T G.711 u-law or A-law PCM with 8-bit samples at 8kHz to be used ## as a call recording warning instead of the built-in English warning. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## SET WARNING_FILE "Warning.wav" ## ############## SECURE SHELL (SSH) SETTINGS ############### ## ## SSH_ALLOWED specifies whether SSH is supported. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled ## 2 Configured using local craft procedure - the SSH server can be enabled or disabled from local craft procedure. ## When this mode is configured, then by default the SSH server is disabled. ## The default of 96x1 H.323 R6.2 up to 6.4 (not included) is 0 (disabled). The default value for 96x1 H.323 6.4 and later is 2. ## The default of 96x1 SIP and B189 is 0 (disabled). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later (values 0-1), value 2 is added in R6.4 and later. ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later (values 0-1) ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later (values 0-1) ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later (values 0-1, default==0) ## SET SSH_ALLOWED 1 ## ## SSH_BANNER_FILE specifies the file name or URL for a custom SSH banner file. ## If the value is null, a default English banner will be used for SSH. ## The value can contain 0 to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SSH_BANNER_FILE http://security.myco.com/files/SSH-Banner.txt ## ## SSH_IDLE_TIMEOUT specifies the number of minutes of inactivity ## after which an SSH connection will be terminated ## Valid values are 0 through 32767; the default value is 10. ## A value of 0 means that the connection will not be terminated due to inactivity. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SSH_IDLE_TIMEOUT 30 ## ######## Enhanced Debugging Capabilities Support ####### ## ## AUTHCTRLSTAT controls whether enhanced debugging capabilities can be activated from the SSH server by ## Avaya technicians only. The parameter shall only be set to 1 for the debugging period by Avaya technicians and ## shall be configured back to 0 when the debugging period is end. ## Value Operation ## 0 Enhanced debugging capabilities are disabled (default). ## 1 Enhanced debugging capabilities are enabled. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.1.0 and later releases (hardware version 3 and up). ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.2 and later releases (hardware version 3 and up). ## SET AUTHCTRLSTAT 1 ## ######## APPLICATION WATCHDOG SETTING (H.323 ONLY) ####### ## ## APPLICATIONWD specifies whether the application watchdog is enabled or disabled ## Value Operation ## 0 Application watchdog is disabled ## 1 Application watchdog is enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET APPLICATIONWD 0 ## ##### SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT (SLA) MONITOR SETTINGS ##### ## ## Please note that SLA Monitor agent requires specification of the root ## (and intermediate if applicable) trusted certificates using TRUSTCERTS for verifying ## the SLA Monitor server certificate. ## ## SLMSTAT specifies whether or not the SLA Monitor agent is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later ## SET SLMSTAT 1 ## ## SLMCAP specifies whether the SLA Monitor agent is enabled for packet capture (sniffing). ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled with payloads are removed from RTP packets ## 2 Enabled with payloads included in RTP packets ## 3 Controlled from craft menu - enable of RTP packets capture or disable packets capture ## using local CRAFT procedures. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later (values 0-3) ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 to R6.5 (values 0-2) ## 96x1 SIP R7.0 and later (values 0-3) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later (values 0-2) ## SET SLMCAP 1 ## ## SLMCTRL specifies whether the SLA Monitor agent is enabled for device control. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## 2 Controlled from craft menu ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later (values 0-2) ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 to R6.5 (values 0-1) ## 96x1 SIP R7.0 and later (values 0-2) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later (values 0-1) ## SET SLMCTRL 1 ## ## SLMPERF specifies whether the SLA Monitor agent is enabled for device performance monitoring. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later ## SET SLMPERF 1 ## ## SLMPORT specifies the UDP port that will be opened by the SLA Monitor agent ## to receive discovery and test request messages. ## Valid values are 6000 through 65535; the default value is 50011. ## Important note: If default port is not used, both the SLA Mon agent and server must ## be configured with the SAME port. SLMPORT impacts the phone's SLA Mon agent configuration. ## A corresponding configuration must also be made on the SLA Mon server agentcom-slamon.conf file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later ## SET SLMPORT 43210 ## ## SLMSRVR specifies the IP address and the port number of the SLA Mon server in the ## aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd:n format. ## Set the IP address of the SLA Mon server in the aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format ## to restrict the registration of agents only to that server. Specifying a port ## number is optional. If you do not specify a port number, the system takes ## 50011 as the default port. If the value of the port number is 0, any port number is acceptable. ## The IP address must be in the dotted decimal format, optionally followed by a ## colon and an integer port number from 0 to 65535. ## To use a non-default port n, set the value of SLMSRVR in the ## aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd:n format, where aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd is the IP address ## of the SLA Mon server. ## Important note: If default port is not used, both the SLA Mon agent and server must ## be configured with the SAME port. SLMSRVR impacts the phone's SLA Mon agent configuration. ## A corresponding configuration must also be made on the SLA Mon server agentcom-slamon.conf file. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.4 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.4 and later ## SET SLMSRVR 192.168.27.35:50011 ## ####### CONVERGED NETWORK ANALYZER (CNA) SETTINGS ######## ## ## CNASRVR specifies a list of CNA server IP addresses. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal (IPv4) or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and R6.1 ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x only ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.2 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## SET CNASRVR 192.168.0.10 ## ## CNAPORT specifies the TCP destination port used for CNA registration. ## Valid values are 0 through 65535; the default value is 50002. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and R6.1 ## 96x1 SIP R6.0.x only ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.0 and later ## 46xx H.323 R2.2 and later ## 46xx SIP R2.2 and later ## SET CNAPORT 65003 ## ############# ENHANCED LOCAL DIALING RULES ############### ## ## These settings affect certain dialing behaviors, such as ## dialing numbers from the incoming Call Log or from web pages ## Please note that the enhanced local dialing rules are not applicable ## when using 96x0/96x1 H.323 phones in IP office environment. ## The parameters below are supported by 16xx H.323 phones. ## ## Dialing Algorithm Status ## Controls whether algorithm defined by parameters in ## this section is used during certain dialing behaviors. ## 0 disables algorithm. ## 1 enables algorithm, but not for Contacts (default). For B189 H.323 only, value 1 has the same meaning as value 0 ## since B189 does not support call log application and WML browser. ## 2 enables algorithm, including Contacts (96xx SIP R2.0 and later, ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later, 96x1/B189 H.323 6.6 and later, H1xx SIP R1.0 and later) SET ENHDIALSTAT 1 ## ## Country Code ## For United States the value is '1' ## Valid values 1 to 999. The default value is 1. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PHNCC "" ## ## Internal extension number length ## If your extension is 12345, your dial plan length is 5. ## On 46xx phones, the maximum extension length is 10. ## On 96xx phones, the maximum extension length is 13. ## This value must match the extension length set on your ## call server. ## Valid values are 3-13. The default value is 5. ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PHNDPLENGTH "" ## ## International access code ## For the United States, the value is 011. ## Valid values are 0 to 4 dialable characters (0-9,*,#). The default value is "011". ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PHNIC "" ## ## Long distance access code ## Valid values are 0 through 9 and empty string. The default value is 1. ## if no long distance access code is needed then SET PHNLD "". ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PHNLD "" ## ## National telephone number Length ## For example, 800-555-1111 has a length of 10. ## Valid values are 5-15. The default value is 10. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PHNLDLENGTH "" ## ## Outside line access code ## The number you press to make an outside call. ## Valid values are 0 to 2 dialable characters (0-9, *, #). The default value is 9. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R2.5 and later SET PHNOL 0 ## ## ELD_SYSNUM ## Controls whether Enhanced Local Dialing algorithm will be ## applied for System Numbers - Busy Indicators and Auto Dials. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disable ELD for System Numbers ## 1 Enable ELD for System Numbers (Default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.1.2 and later. ## ## SET ELD_SYSNUM 1 ## #################### CALL TYPE ANALYSIS ############### ## ## CTASTAT - Call Type Analysis Status ## Controls whether call type analysis algorithm in the Avaya Communication Manager is used ## during certain dialing behaviors. ## 1 use smart enbloc if smart enbloc is enabled/supported by Avaya Communication Manager by History, Redial and WML browser, but not for Contacts. ## 2 use smart enbloc if smart enbloc is enabled/supported by Avaya Communication Manager by History, Redial, WML browser and Contacts (Default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6.2 and later ## B189 H.323 R6.6.2 and later ## SET CTASTAT 1 ## #################### AUDIO SETTINGS ###################### ## ## Automatic Gain Control (AGC). ## These settings enable or disable AGC. ## ## A value of 1 (default) enables AGC. A value of 0 disables AGC. ## AGCHAND controls handset AGC. Not supported on 16CC phones. ## AGCHEAD controls headset AGC ## AGCSPKR controls speaker AGC. Not supported on 16CC phones. ## Note: AGCHAND and AGCSPKR are applicable for 1603 SIP phone. ## Note: AGCHAND, AGCHEAD and AGCSPKR are supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. ## Note: For 96x1 H.323 - User can also change the "Handset/Headset/Speaker Auto Gain Control" fields ## in HOME-> Options & Settings-> Advanced Options -> Automatic Gain Control... menu. ## AGCHAND/AGCHEAD/AGCSPKR will be enforced only in case user did not change at all the relevant "Handset/Headset/Speaker Auto Gain Control" field value. ## Please note that user changes are stored in backup/restore file as "Handset AGC", "Headset AGC" and "Speaker AGC" (if BRURI has a valid value) which means that if the ## restored file include "Handset AGC", "Headset AGC" and/or "Speaker AGC" parameters then they will take precedence over AGCHAND, AGCHEAD and AGCSPKR respectively. ## If BRURI is not valid, but user still change the content of "Handset/Headset/Speaker Auto Gain Control" fields, then user value will take precedence over ## AGCHAND, AGCHEAD and AGCSPKR respectively. The only way to clear user configuration in this case is by doing: ## a. "CLEAR" operation in CRAFT menu, ## b. New user login. ## SET AGCHAND 0 ## SET AGCHEAD 0 ## SET AGCSPKR 0 ## ## Audio Environment Index ## Enables you to customize the telephone's audio ## performance. (0-299) This parameter affects settings ## for AGC dynamic range, handset and headset noise ## reduction thresholds, and headset transmit gain. It is ## highly recommended you consult Avaya before changing ## this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 “0” through “80” (R1.0, R1.1), “0” through “191” (R1.2 - R1.5), “0” through “299” (R2.0+) ## 96x0 SIP R2.6 and later ## 16xx H.323 R1.3 and later ## SET AUDIOENV 0 ## ##################### CUSTOM RING TONES #################### ## ## RINGTONESTYLE specifies the style of ring tones that are offered to the user ## for Personalized Ringing when "Classic" (as opposed to "Rich") is selected. ## Value Operation ## 0 North American ring tones are offered (default) ## 1 European ring tones are offered ## This parameter is supported by: ## 9670 H.323 R2.0 and later ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET RINGTONESTYLE 1 ## ## RINGTONES specifies a list of display names and file names or URLs ## for a custom ring tone files to be downloaded and offered to users. ## The list can contain 0 to 1023 UTF-8 characters; the default value is null (""). ## Values are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## Each value consists of a display name followed by an equals sign followed by a file name or URL. ## Display names may contain spaces, but if any do, the entire list must be quoted. ## Ring tone files must be single-channel WAV files ## coded in ITU-T G.711 u-law or A-law PCM with 8-bit samples at 8kHz. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET RINGTONES "Steam Whistle=tones/swhistle.wav,Car Horn=tones/chorn.wav,Siren=tones/siren.wav" ## ## RINGTONES_UPDATE specifies whether the phone will query the file server to determine whether ## there is an updated version of each custom ring tone file each time the phone starts up or resets. ## Value Operation ## 0 Phone will only try to download ring tones with new display names (default) ## 1 Phone will check for updated version of each ring tone file at startup ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later. ## SET RINGTONES_UPDATE 1 ## ## PROVIDE_CF_RINGTONE specifies whether the call forward ringtone option is provided to the user. ## Value Operation ## 0 the call forward ringtone option is not provided (default) ## 1 the call forward ringtone option is provided ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.3 and later. ## SET PROVIDE_CF_RINGTONE 1 ## ################## File SERVER SETTINGS ################## ## ## HTTP Server Addresses ## [If you set your HTTP Server Addresses via DHCP, do not ## set them here as they will override your DHCP settings. ## Also, use TLSSRVR instead if you require an ## authenticated server] ## Server used to download configuration script files. ## Zero or more HTTP server IP addresses in dotted-decimal, ## colon-hex (96x1 H.323 R6.0 onwards), or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## (0 to 255 ASCII characters, including commas). ## This parameter may also be changed via LLDP. ## Note: This parameter is also supported by 364x SIP phones. ## SET HTTPSRVR 192.168.0.5 ## ## HTTP Server Directory Path ## Specifies the path name to prepend to all file names ## used in HTTP and HTTPS GET operations during startup. ## (0 to 127 ASCII characters, no spaces.) ## Note: This parameter is also supported by 364x SIP phones. ## SET HTTPDIR myhttpdir ## ## HTTP port ## Sets the TCP port used for HTTP file downloads from ## non-Avaya servers. (0-65535) The default value is 80. ## Applies only to 46xx H.323 phones, 96xx phones, 96x1 phones and 364x SIP phones. ## SET HTTPPORT 80 ## ## File Server URL ## Specifies list of file server URLs from which firmware and configuration files shall be downloaded. ## Each URL can include hostname or IP address, port and path. ## This parameter has higher precedence compare to HTTPSRVR, HTTPDIR and HTTPPORT which are kept supported ## for backward compatibility. If FILE_SERVER_URI is configured, then HTTPSRVR, HTTPPORT, HTTPDIR, TLSSRVR, ## TLSDIR and TLSPORT parameters are ignored. Default protocol is http://. Default ports are 80 when http ## is used and 443 when https is used. Default is "". ## This parameter may also be changed via LLDP. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET FILE_SERVER_URL http://example.com:8000/H1xx ## ## Server Authentication ## Sets whether script files are downloaded from an ## authenticated server over an HTTPS link. ## 0 for optional, 1 for mandatory ## Note: This parameter is also supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. ## SET AUTH 0 ## ################## Upgrade Policy ################## ## ## UPGRADE_POLLING_PERIOD ## Specifies the periodic polling interval in minutes of ## upgrade and settings files. The range is 0-10080, where 0 means no periodic polling. The default is 60 minutes. ## In each polling, the upgrade file and settings files are downloaded if modified (using If-Modified-Since) and the device ## check whether new firmware is installed on the file server. If there is a change identified to the settings file ## then the device applies the new settings file. If there is a new firmware detected, then it will be downloaded and installed ## according to UPGRADE_POLICY, UPGRADE_DLOAD_START, UPGRADE_DLOAD_END, UPGRADE_INSTALL_DATE_TIME, DLOAD_RND_AFTER_RESET and ## DLOAD_RND. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET UPGRADE_POLLING_PERIOD 1000 ## ## UPGRADE_POLICY ## Specifies whether the image update is done after reset only, reset and policy configuration parameters or policy only. ## Value Operation ## 0 update of an image after reset only (any reset). ## 1 update of an image according to upgrade policy rules (reset will not trigger new update of an image). ## 2 update of an image after both reset and according to upgrade policy rules (Default) ## Note: Settings files are always downloaded/updated after reset or downloaded/updated if modified each UPGRADE_POLLING_PERIOD ## (independent to UPGRADE_POLICY). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET UPGRADE_POLICY 1 ## ## UPGRADE_DLOAD_START ## Specifies the start time at which phone tries to download the new image files. ## The format is [Ddd]hh where “[Ddd]” is an optional argument ## Ddd is a 3-character string for a day of the week (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat), ## “hh” is one or two numeric digits representing the hour of the day, from 0 through 23. ## If "Ddd" is omitted, the time period would occur every day, and if days are included, the time period would occur once every week. ## If UPGRADE_DLOAD_START and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END are the same then, download of files will be done at any time. ## The default is "00". Up to one start time can be configured. UPGRADE_DLOAD_START is applicable when UPGRADE_POLICY is 1 or 2. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET UPGRADE_DLOAD_START Sun00 ## ## UPGRADE_DLOAD_END ## Specifies the end time at which phone tries to download the new image files. ## The format is [Ddd]hh where “[Ddd]” is an optional argument. ## Ddd is a 3-character string for a day of the week (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat), ## “hh” is one or two numeric digits representing the hour of the day, from 0 through 23. ## If "Ddd" is omitted, the time period would occur every day, and if days are included, the time period would occur once every week. ## If UPGRADE_DLOAD_START and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END are the same then, download of files will be done at any time. ## The default is "00". Up to one end time can be configured. UPGRADE_DLOAD_END is applicable when UPGRADE_POLICY is 1 or 2. ## Note: Existings image download will keep until finished even when UPGRADE_DLOAD_END reached, however, new image downloads will ## be scheduled to next download timeframe. ## Examples: ## If UPGRADE_DLOAD_START is 04 and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END is 08 then the device will download each day the new firmware files (if new ## firmware is detected) from 04:00 to 08:00. ## If UPGRADE_DLOAD_START is 08 and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END is 04 then the device will download each day the new firmware files (if new ## firmware is detected) from 08:00 to 04:00 the next day. ## If UPGRADE_DLOAD_START is Sat20 and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END is Mon04 then the device will download the new firmware (if new ## firmware is detected) from 20:00 on Saturday to 04:00 on Monday each week. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET UPGRADE_DLOAD_END Sun05 ## ## UPGRADE_INSTALL_DATE_TIME ## Specifies The date and time after which new image will be installed. ## If the image was not downloaded yet and the install date/time is reached, then the device download the image immediately (no matter what is the value of ## UPGRADE_DLOAD_START and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END). If the image was not downloaded yet and install date/time in future, then ## the device will download the image according to UPGRADE_DLOAD_START and UPGRADE_DLOAD_END and once UPGRADE_INSTALL_DATE_TIME is reached the image will be installed. ## The format is YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm, where YYYY is a 4 numeric digits representing the year, MM is 2 numeric digits for month 00-12, ## dd is two numeric digits representing the day of the month, from 01 through 31, “T” stand for Time separator, ## hh is two numeric digits representing the hour of the day, from 00 through 23 and mm is two numeric digits representing minutes of the hour, ## from 00 through 59. The default is 1970-01-01T00:00. ## Note: This parameter is related to the phone local time and not absolute time (UTC/GMT). This means that phones in different ## GMTOFFFSET will be installed in the same local time, but in different universe time. The phone calculate its local time ## based on GMTOFFSET, DAYLIGHT_SAVING_SETTING_MODE, DSTOFFSET, DSTSTART and DSTSTOP. ## UPGRADE_INSTALL_DATE_TIME is applicable when UPGRADE_POLICY is 1 or 2. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET UPGRADE_INSTALL_DATE_TIME 2015-04-12T23:20 ## ## DLOAD_RND_AFTER_RESET ## Specifies the interval in seconds for which downloading attempts will be randomized after reboot. ## The range is 0-32767 where 0 is for no randomization (I.e. download image file immediately after reboot). ## 0 is the default value. ## The parameter can be used to avoid congestion of file server in case where multiple devices are reset at the same time ## using SMGR. ## The parameter is applicable only if UPGRADE_POLICY<>1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DLOAD_RND_AFTER_RESET 600 ## ## DLOAD_RND ## Specifies the interval in seconds for which downloading attempts will be randomized during the download slot ## (UPGRADE_DLOAD_START<>UPGRADE_DLOAD_END). ## The range is 0-32767 where 0 is for no randomization (I.e. download image file immediately when UPGRADE_DLOAD_START is reached ## (if UPGRADE_DLOAD_START<>UPGRADE_DLOAD_END)). ## 3600 is the default value. ## The parameter can be used to avoid congestion of file server in case where multiple devices reach the download period slot. ## The parameter is applicable only if UPGRADE_POLICY==1 or 2 and UPGRADE_DLOAD_START<>UPGRADE_DLOAD_END. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET DLOAD_RND 0 ## ## IMAGE_DOWNLOAD_RATE_LIMIT ## Specifies the image download rate from HTTP/S server. ## The range is 0-1,000,000 kbps where 0 is for no rate limit (default). ## The parameter shall be used in cases where the download rate is limited (as in case of remote worker working via broadband connection at home). ## In those cases, administrator can use this parameter to configure the maximum bandwidth used for download of image files. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET IMAGE_DOWNLOAD_RATE_LIMIT 1000 ## #################### RTCP MONITORING ##################### ## ## The RTCP monitor ## One RTCP monitor (VMM server) IP address in ## dotted-decimal format or DNS name format (0 to 15 ## characters). Note that for H.323 telephones only this ## parameter may be changed via signaling from Avaya ## Communication Manager. For 96xx SIP models in Avaya ## environments, this parameter is set via the PPM server. ## This parameter is not supported on 16CC model phones. ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## Note : This setting is supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 as well. ## SET RTCPMON 192.168.0.10 ## ## RTCPMONPORT sets the port used to send RTCP information ## to the IP address specified in the RTCPMON parameter. ## RTCPMONPORT is only supported on 46xx SIP telephones and ## 96xx telephones in non-Avaya environments. For 96xx SIP ## models in Avaya environments, this parameter is set via ## the PPM server. The default value is 5005. ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## Note : This setting is supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 as well. ## SET RTCPMONPORT 5005 ## ## RTCP Monitor Report Period ## Specifies the interval for sending out RTCP monitoring ## reports (5-30 seconds). Default is 5 seconds. This ## parameter applies only to 96xx SIP telephones. ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## SET RTCPMONPERIOD 5 ## ###################### ICMP SETTINGS ##################### ## ## Destination Unreachable Message Control ## Controls whether ICMP Destination Unreachable messages ## are generated. ## 0 for No ## 1 for limited Port Unreachable messages ## 2 for Protocol and Port Unreachable messages ## Note 1: This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## Note 2: This settings is also applicable for H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. ## SET ICMPDU 1 ## ## Redirect Message control ## Controls whether received ICMP Redirect messages will ## be processed ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## Note 1: This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## Note 2: This settings is also applicable for H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. ## SET ICMPRED 0 ## ########### BACKUP/RESTORE SETTINGS (H.323 only) ########## ## ## Backup and Restore URI ## URI used for HTTP backup and retrieval of user data. ## Specify HTTP server and directory path to backup file. ## Do not specify backup file name. ## BRURI is not supported on 96xx, 16CC and 1603 SIP phones. ## BRURI is supported by 16xx H323 phones using http only (not https). ## SET BRURI http://192.168.0.28 ## ## Backup/Restore Authentication ## Specifies whether authentication is used for backup/restore file download. ## Call server IP address and telephone's registration can be used as credentials. ## 0: Call server IP address and telephone's registration password ## are not included as credentials. ## 1: The call server IP address and the telephone's registration ## password are included as the credentials in an Authorization request-header ## SET BRAUTH 0 ## #################### AUDIBLE ALERTING ####################### ## ## Specifies the audible alerting setting for the telephone ## and whether users may change this setting. ## ## A value of 0 turns off audible alerting; user cannot ## adjust ringer volume at all. ## A value of 1 turns on audible alerting; user can adjust ## ringer volume but cannot turn off audible alerting. ## A value of 2 turns off audible alerting; user can adjust ## ringer volume and can turn off audible alerting. ## A value of 3 turns on audible alerting; user can adjust ## ringer volume and can turn off audible alerting. ## ## For 46xx phones: ## A value of 0 or 2 lets the user reduce audible alerting to ## the lowest audible setting, but not zero. ## A value of 1 or 3 lets the user reduce audible alerting to zero. ## ## The default value is 3. ## SET AUDASYS 3 ## ## NOTE: This AUDASYS value is applicable for 16xx phones starting with R1.3. ## ###################### KEY LAYOUT FILES ##################### ## ## KEY_LAYOUT_FILES specifies the URL of the key layout files to be downloaded. ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters, zero or one URL. ## The URL may be specified relative path format (“../” for next higher directory level in relative path format; ## origin is the directory specified by FILE_SERVER_URL or HTTPDIR and TLSDIR depending on download via http or https). ## URL can be also absolute path – in this case it shall begin with http:// or https://. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET KEY_LAYOUT_FILES https://149.49.77.1/DEVICE_NAME.kl ## ############################################################ ## ## 46xx SETTINGS ## Settings applicable to 46xx telephone models ## ############################################################ ## ## IP Filter List Addresses ## Specifies additional IP addresses whose packets are ## allowed through the IP source address filter to be ## processed by the telephone. This parameter should be ## set only if it is suspected that an address is being ## blocked unnecessarily. This parameter may contain one ## or more IP addresses in dotted-decimal or DNS name ## format, separated by commas without any intervening ## spaces (0 to 255 ASCII characters, including commas). ## SET FILTERLIST 192.168.0.45 ## ###### 46XX IP Phone Multi-Language Administration ####### ## ## This setting is used to set the local display ## language of your 46XX telephone. ## ## For all 4620 sets, and either 4610SW or 4620SW sets ## that have been loaded with single-byte software (the ## default), use one of the following settings: ## For English use keyword "English" ## For French use keyword "Francais" ## For Italian use keyword "Italiano" ## For Japanese use keyword "Katakana" ## For Dutch use keyword "Nederlands" ## For German use keyword "Deutsch" ## For Portuguese use keyword "Portugues" ## For Spanish use keyword "Espanol" ## ## For 4620SW/4625SW sets that have been loaded with ## multi-byte software to support Chinese/Russian/Hebrew/ ## English fonts, use one of the following settings: ## For English use keyword "English" ## For Chinese use keyword "Chinese" ## For Russian use keyword "Russian" ## For Hebrew use keyword "Hebrew" ## ## For 4620SW/4625SW sets that have been loaded with ## multi-byte software to support Japanese/Russian/ ## Hebrew/English fonts, use one of the following ## settings: ## For English use keyword "English" ## For Japanese use keyword "Japanese" ## For Russian use keyword "Russian" ## For Hebrew use keyword "Hebrew" ## ## For 4620SW/4625SW sets that have been loaded with ## multi-byte software to support Korean/Russian/Hebrew/ ## English fonts, use one of the following settings: ## For English use keyword "English" ## For Korean use keyword "Korean" ## For Russian use keyword "Russian" ## For Hebrew use keyword "Hebrew" ## ## For all 364x sets running SIP software, use one of the ## following settings: ## For English use keyword "English" ## For French use keyword "Francais" ## For Italian use keyword "Italiano" ## For German use keyword "Deutsch" ## For Spanish use keyword "Espanol" ## For 364x, this parameter will only change the language on ## the phone if the user has not previously changed it via ## the user menus. ## ## SET SYSLANG English ## ###### 46xx Automatic Backup/Restore Settings ######## ## ## RESTORESTAT enables/disables the automatic backup and ## restore of user data. Applies to both FTP and HTTP ## backup/restore. This setting does not apply to the ## 4602 sets. ## ## A value of 1 enables Backup/Restore. ## A value of 0 disables Backup/Restore. ## ## FTPUSERSTAT sets user permissions on modifications to ## server names and directory paths used for FTP ## backup/restore. Does not apply to HTTP backup/restore. ## ## When FTPUSERSTAT is set to 0, the user can only use the ## server and path data administered via DHCP or settings ## file. ## ## When FTPUSERSTAT is set to 1, the user can specify ## alternative FTP servers or directory paths. The default ## is 1. ## ## When FTPUSERSTAT is set to 2, the user can specify ## alternative FTP directory paths but is not allowed to ## specify alternative FTP servers. ## ## FTPSRVR specifies the IP Address of the default FTP ## Server. May be a dotted-decimal address or DNS string. ## Depending on FTPUSERSTAT setting, may be overridden by ## the user. ## ## FTPDIR specifies the default directory path used for ## storage and retrieval of phone user information. ## Depending on FTPUSERSTAT setting, may be overridden by ## the user. ## ## SET RESTORESTAT 1 ## SET FTPUSERSTAT 1 ## SET FTPSRVR 135.18.18.18 ## SET FTPDIR myftpdir ## ############################################################ ## ## 96xx, H1xx, 16xx and 16CC SETTINGS ## Settings applicable to 96xx,16xx and 16CC models ## ############################################################ ## ## Voice Mail Telephone Number ## Specifies the telephone number to be dialed ## automatically when the telephone user presses the ## Messaging button. The specified number is used to ## connect to the user's Voice Mail system. ## ## Note 1: This parameter setting is ignored for extensions ## configured as 96xx station types on the call server. ## Note 2: This parameter is supported on 364x phones and ## can be up to 50 characters, no spaces. ## SET MSGNUM 1234 ## ## English Language Selection Status ## Specifies whether built-in English language text strings ## are selectable by the user. 0 for off, 1 for on. ## Note : This setting is applicable for 16xx H323 and 1603 SIP phones also. ## SET LANG0STAT 1 ## ################ A(Avaya) Menu Settings ################# ## ## WML-Application URI ## URI used for WML-applications under A (AVAYA) Menu. ## Specify HTTP server and directory path to administration ## file (AvayaMenuAdmin.txt). Do not specify the ## administration file name. This parameter applies to 96xx H323 ## model phones and also supported in 96xx SIP releases from R2.5 onwards ## and 96x1 SIP releases from R6.2 onwards. ## ## SET AMADMIN http://192.168.0.28 ## ## ################################################################# ## ## H.323 SETTINGS for 96xx & 96x1 ## Settings specific to 96xx & 96x1 telephones ## with H.323 software ## ########################## Features on Softkeys ####################### ## ## Idle Feature Settings ## A list of feature identifiers for softkey features ## available in the Idle call state ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters: zero to six whole numbers ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces ## SET IDLEFEATURES "" ## ## Dial Feature Settings ## A list of feature identifiers for softkey features ## available in the Dialing call state ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters :zero to five whole numbers separated ## by commas without any intervening spaces ## SET DIALFEATURES "" ## ## Ring Back Feature Settings ## A list of feature identifiers for softkey features ## available in the Active with far end ringback call state ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters :zero to three whole numbers ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces ## SET RINGBKFEATURES "" ## ## Talk Feature Settings ## A list of feature identifiers for softkey features ## available in the Active with talk path call state ## 0 to 255 ASCII characters :zero to three whole numbers ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces ## SET TALKFEATURES "" ## ## Team Button Display ## When TEAMBTNDISPLAY is set to 1, use LED to mark the Busy state of their team member's phone ## When TEAMBTNDISPLAY is set to 0, use the LED to mark the Forwarding state of the team member's phone. ## Default = 0. ## Note: This feature is available on H.323 release 3.0 for 96xx & release 6.0 for 96x1 phones. ## SET TEAMBTNDISPLAY 0 ## ## WORLDCLOCKAPP specifies the application to display World Clock information. ## Note: This feature is available on H.323 release 2.0 for 9670 & release 6.0 for 9641 & 9621. ## "" : World Clock application is disabled ## "default" : World Clock application is enabled (default) SET WORLDCLOCKAPP default ## ## WEATHERAPP specifies the application to display the weather information. ## Value Operation ## "" (null) Weather application is disabled ## "default" Weather application is enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 9621 and 9641 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 9670 H.323 R2.0 and later SET WEATHERAPP default ## ## CALCSTAT specifies whether the Calculator application should be displayed. ## Valid Values ## 0 Don't display Calculator ## 1 Display Calculator SET CALCSTAT 1 ## Note: This feature is available on release 6.0 for 9641 & 9621. ## ## RINGPRIORITY specifies which distinctive ring rate is really for a Priority Call. ## Valid Values ## 1 Inside Call rate ## 2 Outside Call rate ## 3 Priority Ring rate ## SET RINGPRIORITY 3 ## ## LEDMODE specifies whether the buttons red LEDs are controlled by CM (this will align the 96x1 phone behavior to the 16xx behavior) ## or locally by the phone (as 96x1 previous loads behavior ). ## Value Operation ## 0 Locally controlled by the phone, backward compatible to previous releases (default) ## 1 Controlled by CM, new behavior ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.3 and later ## SET LEDMODE 0 ## ################ VPN SETTINGS (H.323 ONLY) ################# ## ## NVVPNMODE specifies whether or not VPN operation will be enabled. ## Valid Values ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## SET NVVPNMODE 1 ## ## NVSGIP specifies a list of IP addresses for VPN security gateways. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## SET NVSGIP primarysg.mycompany.com ## ## VPNALLOWTAGS specifies whether 802.1Q tags (controlled by L2Q parameter) can be used in VPN mode ## Value Operation ## 0 Tags will not be allowed if VPN mode is active (default) ## 1 Tags will be allowed if VPN mode is active ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.6 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.5 and later ## SET VPNALLOWTAGS 1 ## ## DHCPSRVR specifies a list of enterprise DHCP server IP addresses from which configuration ## parameters may be requested through a VPN tunnel via a DHCPINFORM message. ## Addresses can be in dotted-decimal or DNS name format, ## separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## SET DHCPSRVR 192.168.16.2 ## ## NVVPNCFGPROF ## Valid Values ## 0 No profile (default) ## 2 Checkpoint ## 3 Cisco Xauth with Preshared Key ## 5 Juniper/Netscreen Xauth with Preshared Key ## 6 Generic Preshared key ## 8 Cisco xauth with certificates ## 9 Juniper Xauth with certificates. ## 11 Nortel contivity ## Description ## Set this to 3 if Security Gateway Vendor is Cisco and Xauth is used for ## authenticating phone user. ## Set this to 5 if Security Gateway Vendor is Juniper, Xauth is used for ## authenticating phone user. ## Set this to 6 if Security Gateway Vendor does not support Xauth. ## Following Variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 3 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 11 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 1 ## Following Variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 5 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 3 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 1 ## Following Variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 6 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 2 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 3 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 1 ## Following variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 2 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 11 ## NVIKEOVERTCP 1 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 2 ## Following variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 11 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 11 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 1 ## Following variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 8 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 11 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 1 ## Following variables are set to specified value when NVVPNCFGPROF = 9 ## NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## NVIKEIDTYPE 3 ## NVIKEXCHGMODE 1 ## Note: SET commands for all the dependent variables mentioned above must ## appear after SET command for NVVPNCFGPROF. ## SET NVVPNCFGPROF 5 ## ## NVIKEXCHGMODE specifies the exchange method to be used for IKE Phase 1. ## Valid Values ## 1 Aggressive Mode (default) ## 2 Main Mode ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## SET NVIKEXCHGMODE 2 ## ## NVIKECONFIGMODE enables IKE configuration mode. ## Valid Values: ## 1 Enabled (default) ## 2 Disabled ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## SET NVIKECONFIGMODE 1 ## ## NVVPNAUTHTYPE ## Valid Values ## 3 PSK (default) ## 4 PSK with XAUTH ## 5 RSA Signature with XAUTH ## 6 HYBRID XAUTH ## 7 RSA Signature ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 and later ## SET NVVPNAUTHTYPE 4 ## ## NVVPNUSER specifies the user name to use for VPN authentication. ## Normally, this value is entered by the user and not set in this file. ## However, if the user names are set in a staging environment using IF statements ## based on the telephones' MAC addresses, or if the user name is a fixed string ## based on the serial number and/or the MAC address of the telephone, ## it may be preconfigured in a file to eliminate the need for the user to manually enter the value. ## If the value contains the string "$SERIALNO" (without the double quotes), ## that string will be replaced by the telephone's serial number, and ## if the value contains the string "$MACADDR" (without the double quotes), ## that string will be replaced by the telephone's MAC address. ## Valid values are strings of ASCII characters; the default value is null (""). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later (0 to 30 ASCII characters) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.2 and later (0 to 50 ASCII characters) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1.1 through R3.1.5 (0 to 30 ASCII characters) ## 96x0 H.323 R3.1 (0 to 16 ASCII characters) ## SET NVVPNUSER AvayaPhone$SERIALNO ## ## NVVPNPSWDTYPE ## Valid Values ## 1 Save in Flash. ## 2 Erase on reset. ## 3 Numeric One Time Password. ## 4 Alpha-Numeric One Time Password. ## 5 Erase on VPN Termination ## Description ## This variables determines how password should be treated. By default ## password type is set to 1. You must set this variable to 3 or 4 if ## using One Time Password such as SecureID from RSA. ## Note ## Setting password type to 3 will not let the user select "Alpahbets" ## while entering password. This might look like an obvious choice when ## using RSA secure ID tokens. However under some conditions user may ## need to respond back by entering 'y' or 'n' in the password field. ## This could happen if RSA ACE server is configured to generate PIN ## instead of letting the user select a PIN. ## Example : Setting password type to 2 (Erase on reset) ## SET NVVPNPSWDTYPE 1 ## ## NVVPNCOPYTOS ## Valid Values ## 1 YES ## 2 NO ## Description ## Value of this variable decides whether TOS bits should be copied from ## inner header to outer header or not. If it's value is 1, TOS bits are ## copied otherwise not. By default TOS bits are not copied from inner ## header to outer header. Some Internet Service Provider don't route the ## IP packets properly if TOS bits are set to anything other than 0. ## Example ## SET NVVPNCOPYTOS 1 ## Note ## It is highly recommended that this value should not be changed if phone ## is downloading the script over the VPN tunnel in order to avoid ## overriding end user setting due to ISP specific issues. For example you ## can set this value to 1 while provisioning phone with VPN firmware so ## that phone can take advantage of QOS service provided by home router but ## if the phone's ISP (Few percent cases) does not handle properly the ## packets with non-zero TOS bits in IP header, phone user will have to ## revert back this value to 2. Under such circumstances it is desirable ## the user's choice don't get overriden every time script is downloaded. ## Example: Setting NVVPNCOPYTOS to 1 if script is not downloaded over VPN tunnel. ## IF $VPNACTIVE SEQ 1 GOTO skipcopytos ## SET NVVPNCOPYTOS 1 ## # skipcopytos ## SET NVVPNCOPYTOS 2 ## ## NVVPNENCAPS ## Valid Values ## 0 4500-4500 ## 1 Disable ## 2 2070-500 ## 4 RFC (As per RFC 3947 and 3948) ## Description ## Type of UDP encapsulation method to use if there is a NAT device between ## phone and the security gateway. By default UDP Encapsulation 4500-4500 ## is used. ## If NVVPNENCAPS is 0, ike negotiation starts with source port of 2070 ## and destination port 500. Negotiation switches to port source port ## 4500 and destination port 4500 if peer supports port floating (Ref ## RFC 3947,3948). Finally IPsec traffic is send inside UDP packets ## from/to port 4500 if supported by peer or port 2070<->500 if port ## floating is not supported but UDP encapsulation is supported as ## published in the initial draft versions of RFC 3947 and 3948. ## If NVVPNENCAPS is 1, ike nat traversal is completly disabled. ## If NVVPNENCAPS is 2, Port floating is disabled during IKE nat traversal. ## If NVVPNENCAPS is 4, ike negotiation starts with source port of 500 and ## destination port 500. Negotiation switches to port source port 4500 ## and destination port 4500 if peer supports port floating (Ref RFC 3947 ## and 3948). Finally IPsec traffic is send inside UDP packets from/to ## port 4500 if supported by peer or port 500<->500 if port floating is ## not supported but UDP encapsulation is supported as published in the ## initial draft versions of RFC 3947 and 3948. ## Note ## UDP Encapsulation causes overhead hence it might be desirable to disable ## udp encapsulation if NAT device supports IPsec pass through and there is ## only one IPsec client behind the NAT connecting to the same security ## gateway. However not all devices support IPsec pass through hence this ## value must not be pushed if phone is downloading the script over the VPN tunnel. ## Example : Setting NVVPNENCAPS to 1 if script is not downloaded over VPN tunnel. ## ## IF $VPNACTIVE SEQ 1 goto skipencaps ## SET NVVPNENCAPS 1 ## # skipencaps ## ## The example above will set NVVPNENCAPS to 1 if script is not downloaded over the tunnel. ## SET NVVPNENCAPS 0 ## ## NVIKEPSK ## Valid Values ## String. Length of the string cannot exceed 30 characters. ## Description ## Preshared Key to use during phase 1 negotiation. ## Note ## It is recommened that user enter his/her Preshared Key using phone's ## dialpad. However if you don't want to share PSK with the end user ## because it's common for multiple users you can use this variable to ## push PSK (Group password) to each phone and the end user will never ## know what the PSK is. But if you are doing this, make sure that the file ## server is on an isolated network and is used only for provisioning ## VPN parameters to the phones. ## Example : Setting abc1234 as Preshared Key ## SET NVIKEPSK abc1234 ## ## NVIKEID ## Valid Values ## String. Length of the string cannot exceed 30 characters. ## Description ## Phone uses this string as IKE Identifier during phase 1 negotiation. ## Some XAuth documentation refer to this variable as group name because ## same IKE Id is shared among a group of user and indvidual user ## authentication is done using XAuth after establishing IKE phase 1 ## security association. ## The default value is "VPNPHONE". ## SET NVIKEID phones@sales.com ## ## NVIKEIDTYPE ## Valid Values ## 1 IP Address ## 2 FQDN ## 3 User-FQDN (E-Mail) ## 9 Directory-Name ## 11 KEY-ID (Opaque) ## Description ## Phone uses this variable as the IKE Identifier type for the ## IKE-ID specified via NVIKEID variable. ## Note ## This variable default value depends on the value of variable NVVPNCFGPROF. ## SET NVIKEIDTYPE 2 ## ## NVIPSECSUBNET ## Valid Values ## Comma separated list of strings containing subnet and masks. Number of ## strings cannot exceed 5. ## Description ## This variable contains IP subnets protected by the security gateway. ## By default phone assumes that all the network resources are behind ## the security gateway hence it negotiates for a security association ## between it's IP address (or Virtual IP if delevired via IKE Config ## mode) and 0.0.0.0 with the security gateway. If your security gateway ## is configured to allow building security association for only selected ## subnets, you can specify them here. ## Example : ## Configuring 10.1.12.0/24 and 172.16.0.0/16 as the subnets protected by ## the Security Gateway ## SET NVIPSECSUBNET 10.1.12.0/24,172.16.0.0/16 ## SET NVIPSECSUBNET 0.0.0.0/0 ## ## NVIKEDHGRP specifies the number of the DH group to use during IKE phase 1 negotiation. ## Valid Values ## 1 Diffie-Hellman Group 1 ## 2 Diffie-Hellman Group 2 (default) ## 5 Diffie-Hellman Group 5 ## 14 Diffie-Hellman Group 14 ## 15 Diffie-Hellman Group 15 ## SET NVIKEDHGRP 1 ## ## NVPFSDHGRP specifies the number of the DH group to use during IKE phase 2 negotiation ## for establishing IPsec security associations also known as perfect forward secrecy (PFS). ## Valid Values ## 0 No PFS (default) ## 1 Diffie-Hellman Group 1 ## 2 Diffie-Hellman Group 2 ## 5 Diffie-Hellman Group 5 ## 14 Diffie-Hellman Group 14 ## 15 Diffie-Hellman Group 15 ## SET NVPFSDHGRP 14 ## ## NVIKEP1ENCALG specifies the Encryption Algorithm(s) proposed for the IKE Phase 1 Security Association. ## Valid Values ## 0 ANY (default) ## 1 AES-128 ## 2 3DES ## 3 DES ## 4 AES-192 ## 5 AES-256 ## Note that the priority order of algorithms proposed is AES-128,3DES,DES,AES-192,AES-256. ## In very rare circumstances a security gateway may not handle multiple proposals. ## In such cases only you should try overriding the default behaviour. ## SET NVIKEP1ENCALG 1 ## ## NVIKEP2ENCALG specifies the encryption algorithm(s) proposed for the IKE Phase 2 Security Association. ## Valid Values ## 0 ANY (default) ## 1 AES-128 ## 2 3DES ## 3 DES ## 4 AES-192 ## 5 AES-256 ## 6 NULL ## Note that the priority order of algorithms proposed is AES-128,3DES,DES,AES-192,AES-256. ## In very rare circumstances a security gateway may not handle multiple proposals. ## In such cases only you should try overriding the default behaviour. ## SET NVIKEP2ENCALG 1 ## ## NVIKEP1AUTHALG specifies the authentication algorithm(s) to propose for the IKE phase 1 Security Association. ## Valid Values ## 0 ANY (default) ## 1 MD5 ## 2 SHA1 ## Note that the prioirity order of algorithims proposed is MD5,SHA1. ## In very rare circumstances a security gateway may not handle multiple proposals. ## In such cases only you should try overriding the default behaviour. ## SET NVIKEP1AUTHALG 1 ## ## NVIKEP2AUTHALG ## Valid Values ## 0 ANY ## 1 MD5 ## 2 SHA1 ## Description ## Authentication Algorithim(s) to propose for IKE phase 2 Security ## Association ## Note ## Phone by default proposes all Authentication algorithms. Security ## Gateway picks the algorithm mandated by administrator. Priority order ## of algorithms proposed by phone is MD5,SHA1. In very rare circumstances ## security gateway may not handle multiple proposals. In such cases ## only you should try overriding the default behaviour. ## Example : Setting Authentication Alg to SHA1 ## SET NVIKEP2AUTHALG 1 ## SET NVIKEP2AUTHALG 0 ## ## NORTELAUTH specifies the Authentication method for Nortel Contivity security gateways. ## Valid Values ## 1 Local username and password ## 2 RADIUS username and password ## 3 Radius SecureId ## 4 RADIUS Axent ## SET NORTELAUTH 2 ## ## NVXAUTH specifies whether or not XAUTH user authentication is enabled. ## Valid Values ## 1 Enabled (default) ## 2 Disabled ## This parameter can be used to disable XAUTH user authentication ## for profiles which enable XAUTH by default. ## SET NVXAUTH 1 ## ## QTESTRESPONDER ## Valid Values: ## IP Address or domain name of the host acting as QTESTRESPONDER ## Description ## If this information is supplied, phone performs QTEST using ## UDP Echo port 7 with the host indicated by this variable. ## SET QTESTRESPONDER 10.1.1.1 ## ## VPNCODE ## Valid Values: 0 to 7 ASCII numeric digits, null ("") and "0" through "9999999" ## Description: Specifies the VPN procedure access code ## SET VPNCODE 876 ## ## VPNPROC specifies whether VPNCODE can be used to access the VPN procedure. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 View only ## 2 View and edit ## SET VPNPROC 1 ## ## ALWCLRNOTIFY specifies whether unencrypted ISAKMP Notification Payloads will be accepted. ## Valid Values: 1 ASCII numeric digit, "0" or "1" ## SET ALWCLRNOTIFY 0 ## ## DROPCLEAR specifies the treatment of received unencrypted (clear) IPsec packets. ## Valid Values: 1 ASCII numeric digit, "0" or "1" ## SET DROPCLEAR 1 ## ## NVMCIPADD ## Valid Values: 0 to 255 ASCII characters zero or more IP addresses in dotted decimal, ## colon-hex or DNS name format, separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## Description: Call server IP addresses ## SET NVMCIPADD 0.0.0.0 ## ## NVHTTPSRVR ## Valid Values: 0 to 255 ASCII characters zero or more IP addresses in dotted decimal, ## colon-hex or DNS name format, separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## Description: HTTP file server IP addresses used to initialize HTTPSRVR the next time the phone starts up. ## SET NVHTTPSRVR 0.0.0.0 ## ## NVTLSSRVR ## Valid Values: 0 to 255 ASCII characters zero or more IP addresses in dotted decimal, ## colon-hex or DNS name format, separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## Description: HTTPS file server IP addresses used to initialize TLSSRVR the next time the phone starts up. ## SET NVTLSSRVR 0.0.0.0 ## ## NVIKEOVERTCP specifies whether and when to use TCP as a transport protocol for IKE. ## Value Operation ## 0 Never ## 1 Auto ## 2 Always ## SET NVIKEOVERTCP 0 ## ## NVIKEP1LIFESEC specifies the proposed IKE SA lifetime in seconds. ## Valid Values: 3 to 8 ASCII numeric digits, "600" through "15552000" ## SET NVIKEP1LIFESEC 432000 ## ## NVIKEP2LIFESEC specifies the proposed IPsec SA lifetime in seconds. ## Valid Values: 3 to 8 ASCII numeric digits, "600" through "15552000" ## SET NVIKEP2LIFESEC 432000 ## ## NVVPNSVENDOR specifies the security gateway Vendor to be used. ## Value Vendor ## 1 Juniper/Netscreen ## 2 Cisco ## 3 Checkpoint/ Nokia ## 4 Other ## 5 Nortel ## SET NVVPNSVENDOR 4 ## ## NVVPNUSERTYPE specifies whether the user can change the VPN username. ## Value Operation ## 1 The username can be changed during manual credential entry ## 2 The username cannot be changed during manual credential entry ## SET NVVPNUSERTYPE 1 ## ## VPNTTS specifies whether TTS is enabled or disabled when VPN is enabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled ## SET VPNTTS 0 ## ############################################################# ## IPv6 related Settings for 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## ## NDREDV6 ## Valid Values ## 0 disable ## 1 enable ## Description ## Controls whether IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Redirect messages will be processed ## Note ## Received Redirect messages will be processed if and only if the value of ## the parameter NDREDV6 is "1" otherwise they will be ignored. ## SET NDREDV6 0 ## ## DHCPPREF ## Valid Values ## 4 DHCPv4 ## 6 DHCPv6 ## Description ## Specifies whether new values received via DHCPv4 orDHCPv6 will be preferred ## when both are used, ## Example : Setting prefernace to recived DHCPPv4 values ## SET DHCPPREF 4 ## SET DHCPPREF 6 ## ## DHCPSTAT ## Valid Values ## 1 run DHCPv4 only (IPv4only-mode, if no own IPv6 address is programmed statically) ## 2 run DHCPv6 only (IPv6only-mode, if no own IPv4 address is programmed statically) ## 3 run both DHCPv4 & DHCPv6 (dual-stack mode) ## Description ## Specifies whether DHCPv4, DHCPv6, or both will be used in case IPV6STAT has enabled IPv6 support generally ## Example : Setting dual stack mode ## SET DHCPSTAT 3 ## SET DHCPSTAT 1 ## ## IPPREF ## Valid Values ## 4 IPv4 ## 6 IPv6 ## Description ## Control whether an IPv4 or an IPv6 address returned by DNS would be ## tried first during dual-mode operation. ## In general, if dual-stack operation is enabled, whether IPv4 or IPv6 ## is to be used to contact a server is determined by the value of the ## parameter that contains the server address(es). However, if the value ## is a DNS name and if DNS returns both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address, ## the order in which they will be tried will be based on the order in ## which they are returned to the application by the DNS resolver, which ## is controlled by the parameter ## Example : Setting preference to IPv4 ## SET IPPREF 4 ## SET IPPREF 6 ## ## IPV6STAT ## Valid Values ## 0 IPv6 will not be supported. ## 1 IPv6 will be supported. ## Description ## Specifies whether IPv6 will be supported ## SET IPV6STAT 0 ## ## PINGREPLYV6 ## Valid Values ## 0 ICMPv6 Echo Reply messages will not be sent ## 1 ICMPv6 Echo Reply messages will be sent only in reply to received Echo ## Request messages with a Destination Address equal to one of the telephone's ## unicast IPv6 addresses. ## 2 ICMPv6 Echo Reply messages will be sent in reply to received Echo Request ## messages with a Destination Address equal to one of the telephone's unicast, ## multicast or anycast IPv6 addresses. ## Description ## Specifies whether ICMPv6 Echo Reply messages will be sent. ## SET PINGREPLYV6 1 ## ## GRATNAV6 specifies whether gratuitous (unsolicited) IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement messages ## will be processed if they are received. ## Value Operation ## 0 Gratuitous IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement messages will not be processed (default) ## 1 Gratuitous IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement messages will be processed ## SET GRATNAV6 0 ## ################################################################################### ############################################################ ## CTI SETTINGS (46xx H.323 ONLY) ############################################################ ## ## CTISTAT specifies the status of the Computer-Telephony Interface. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled (default) ## 1 Enabled ## SET CTISTAT 1 ## ## CTIUDPPORT specifies the UDP port number for reception of broadcast CTI discovery messages. ## Valid values are 49714-49721; the default value is 49721. ## SET CTIUDPPORT 49717 ## ############################################################ ## ## 46xx SIP SETTINGS ## Settings applicable only to 46xx telephone models ## running the SIP protocol ## ############################################################ ## ## DATESEPARATOR sets the character to be used to delineate the date values. ## The default is a backslash. ## SET DATESEPARATOR / ## ## DATETIMEFORMAT sets the formatting of the date display. ## The default is 0, which means the SIP phone will display ## 12-hour time and displays dates in mm/dd/yy format. ## Setting DATETIMEFORMAT to 1 means the SIP phone will ## display 12-hour time and displays dates in dd/mm/yy ## format. Setting DATETIMEFORMAT to 2 means the SIP phone ## will display 24-hour time and displays dates in ## mm/dd/yy format. Setting DATETIMEFORMAT to 3 means the ## SIP phone will display 24-hour time and displays dates ## in dd/mm/yy format. ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## SET DATETIMEFORMAT 0 ## ## DIALWAIT sets the time (in seconds) the phone waits ## after the user enters the most recent dialable character ## before it automatically begins dialing. A value of 0 ## disables the wait timer. The default is 5, and valid ## values are 0-10 seconds. ## SET DIALWAIT 5 ## ############################################################ ## ## SIP SETTINGS ## Settings applicable only to 46xx telephone models ## or 96xx telephone models in non-Avaya environments ## ############################################################ ## ## CALLFWDSTAT sets the call forwarding mode of the set by summing the values below: ## 1 Permits unconditional call forwarding ## 2 Permits call forward on busy ## 4 Permits call forward/no answer ## A value of 0 disables call forwarding. ## The default is 0. ## Example: a value of 6 allows Call Forwarding on busy and on no answer. ## SET CALLFWDSTAT 3 ## ## CALLFWDDELAY sets the number of ring cycles before the ## call is forwarded to the forward or coverage address. ## The default delay is one ring cycle. ## SET CALLFWDDELAY 5 ## ## CALLFWDADDR sets the address to which calls are forwarded for the call forwarding feature. ## The default is null (""). ## Note the user can change or replace this administered value if CALLFWDSTAT is not 0. ## SET CALLFWDADDR cover@avaya.com ## ## COVERAGEADDR sets the address to which calls will be forwarded for the call coverage feature. ## The default is null (""). ## Note the user can change or replace this administered value if CALLFWDSTAT is not 0. ## SET COVERAGEADDR cover@avaya.com ## ## SIPCONFERENCECONTINUE specifies whether a conference call continues after the host hangs up. ## This parameter is not supported on 46xx telephones. ## 0 for drop all parties (default) ## 1 for continue conference ## SET SIPCONFERENCECONTINUE 0 ## ## PROVIDE_TRANSFER_TYPE provides the call transfer type in 3rd party environments. ## No meaning for Avaya environment ## Value 0 or 1 (default 0) ## SET PROVIDE_TRANSFER_TYPE 0 ## ## CALL_TRANSFER_MODE determines the call transfer mode in 3rd party environments. ## Value 0 or 1 (default is 0) ## SET CALL_TRANSFER_MODE 0 ## ############################################################ ## ## 96xx, 16CC and H1xx SIP SETTINGS ## Settings applicable only to 96xx and 16CC telephone ## models and H1xx Video collaboration Station running ## the SIP protocol ## ############################################################ ## ## Power over Ethernet conservation mode ## If POE_CONS_SUPPORT is set to 1 then Power conservation mode is supported. ## If this parameter is set to 0 then Power conservation mode is not supported. ## Note: Not supported by H1xx SIP. ## SET POE_CONS_SUPPORT 1 ## ## Personalize button labels ability ## CNGLABEL determines ability to personalize button labels to be displayed to ## the user. If it is set to 0 then ability will not be displayed to user. ## If it is set to 1 then personalize button labels ability will be exposed to user. ## Default value is 1. ## Note: Not supported by H1xx SIP. ## SET CNGLABEL 1. ## ## Selection of Conference Method ## If CONFERENCE_TYPE is set to 0 then local conferencing is supported based on ## sipping services. If set to 1 then server based conferencing is supported. ## If it is set to 2 then click-to conference server based conferencing is supported. ## If it is set to outside range then default value is selected. ## Default value is 1. ## Note: Not supported by H1xx SIP. ## SET CONFERENCE_TYPE 1 ## ## Call Coverage Tone ## Specifies the tone to play when a call goes to ## coverage. The default is 1 and valid values are 1-4. ## SET REDIRECT_TONE 1 ## ## ENABLE_EARLY_MEDIA specifies whether the phone sets up a voice channel ## to the called party before the call is answered. ## Setting this parameter to 1 can speed up call setup. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## SET ENABLE_EARLY_MEDIA 1 ## ## USE_QUAD_ZEROES_FOR_HOLD specifies the method to use to indicate that a call is on hold. ## A setting of 1 is useful for compatibility with 3rd party SIP endpoints. ## 0 for "a= directional attributes" ## 1 for 0.0.0.0 IP address ## Note: This setting is supported on 364x SIP phones. ## SET USE_QUAD_ZEROES_FOR_HOLD 0 ## ## RTCPCONT specifies whether the sending of RTCP is enabled. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## Note: This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## SET RTCPCONT 1 ## ## RTCP_XR specifies whether VoIP Metrics Report Block as defined in RTP Control Protocol Extended Reports (RTCP XR) ## (RFC 3611) is sent as part of RTCP packets to remote peer or to RTCP monitoring server. ## 0 for No (Default) ## 1 for Yes ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R7.0.0 and later ## SET RTCP_XR 1 ## ## MTU_SIZE specifies the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size transmitted by the phone. ## Valid values are 1496 or 1500. ## Use 1496 for older Ethernet switches. ## Note: This parameter is also applicable for H1xx SIP R1.0 and later for Ethernet interface only ## (not Wi-Fi interface where the MTU is fixed 1500 bytes). ## SET MTU_SIZE 1500 ## ## MEDIAENCRYPTION specifies which media encryption (SRTP) options will be supported. ## Up to 2 or 3 options may be specified in a comma-separated list. ## 2 options are supported by: ## 1. Prior releases to 96x1 SIP 7.0.0 ## 2. H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 3. 96x0 SIP R1.0 to R2.6.14.1 ## 3 options are supported by 96x1 SIP R7.0.0 and later and H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later. ## For 96x0 SIP R2.6.14.5 and later, up to 3 options may be specified, but only the first two supported options are used. ## Options should match those specified in CM IP-codec-set form. ## 1 = aescm128-hmac80 ## 2 = aescm128-hmac32 ## 3 = aescm128-hmac80-unauth ## 4 = aescm128-hmac32-unauth ## 5 = aescm128-hmac80-unenc ## 6 = aescm128-hmac32-unenc ## 7 = aescm128-hmac80-unenc-unauth ## 8 = aescm128-hmac32-unenc-unauth ## 9 = none (default) ## 10 = aescm256-hmac80 ## 11 = aescm256-hmac32 ## Options 10 and 11 are supported by 96x1 SIP R7.0.0 and later and H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later. ## Note: The list of media encryption (SRTP) options is ordered from high (left) to the low (right) options. The phone will publish this list in the SDP-OFFER ## or choose from SDP-OFFER list according to the list order defined in MEDIAENCRYPTION. Please note that Avaya Communication Manager has the capability ## to change the list order in the SDP-OFFER (for audio only) when the SDP-OFFER pass through CM. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## 96x0 SIP R1.0 and later ## SET MEDIAENCRYPTION 1,9 ## SET MEDIAENCRYPTION 10,1,9 ## ## SUBSCRIBE_SECURITY specifies the use of SIP or SIPS for subscriptions. ## If SUBSCRIBE_SECURITY is 0, the phone uses SIP for both the Request URI and the ## Contact Header regardless of whether SRTP is enabled. If SUBSCRIBE_SECURITY is 1, ## the phone uses SIPS for both the Request URI and the Contact Header if SRTP is enabled ## (TLS is on and MEDIAENCRYPTION has at least one valid crypto suite). ## If SUBSCRIBE_SECURITY is 2, and the SES/PPM does not show a FS-DeviceData FeatureName ## with a FeatureVersion of 2 in the response to the getHomeCapabilities request ## For IP office environment, the applicable values are 0 and 1. ## SET SUBSCRIBE_SECURITY 2 ## #################### IP OFFICE SETTINGS #################### ## ## ENABLE_IPOFFICE specifies whether the deployment environment is IP Office ## Value Operation ## 0 Not IP Office environment ## 1 IP Office environment ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 and later ## SET ENABLE_IPOFFICE 1 ## ## SUBSCRIBE_LIST_NON_AVAYA specifies comma separated list of event packages to subscribe to after registration. ## Possible values are: “reg”, “dialog”, “mwi”, “ccs”, “message-summary” which is identical to “mwi”, “avaya-ccs-profile” which is identical to “ccs” ## The values are case insensitive. ## For IPO the recommended value shall be “reg, message-summary, avaya-ccs-profile”. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 and later ## SET SUBSCRIBE_LIST_NON_AVAYA "reg, message-summary, avaya-ccs-profile" ## #################### DISPLAY SETTINGS #################### ## ## Display Colors and Layout ## Specifies a list of tuples describing color scheme and ## layout used in phone display. See Administrator's guide ## for additional detail. (0 to 1023 ASCII characters) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP. ## SET SKINS Yankees=http://mycompany.com/skins/yankees_color/pinstripes.xml ## ## Selected skin for display layout ## If CURRENT_SKIN is selected(not empty string), then that particular skin is selected ## for display. This parameter should be one of the label as defined in 'SKINS' ## configuration parameter. If it is empty or not set then default skin is used. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP. ## SET CURRENT_SKIN "" ## ## Display Logo (96x1) / Wallpaper (H1xx) ## Specifies a list of tuples describing logo/wallpaper used as phone ## display background. See Administrator's guide for ## additional detail. This parameter is not supported on ## 16CC phones. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later. Only Full path URLs are supported (relative paths are not supported). ## The models supported are: 9611G, 9621G and 9641G. The Maximum size (pixels) are: 217 x 130, ## 232 x 140 and 232 x 140 respectively with color depth 16 bit and JPG file type. ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later. LOGOS defines list of administrator wallpapers. ## For best results, H175 Wallpapers resolution shall be 1280x800 with 24 bits color depth. ## The following file types are supported by H175: PNG, JPG (JPEG), GIF and BMP (GIF is presented without animation). ## SET LOGOS FIFAWorldCup=../fifa_logo.jpg ## SET LOGOS FIFAWorldCup=http://10.11.12.13/logo.jpg ## SET LOGOS FIFAWorldCup=http://logos.com/logo.jpg ## SET LOGOS NordWest=http://10.128.20.33/NW_Logo.jpg SET LOGOS SEVERINDE=http://sipfile.severin.de/SeverinLogo_232x140.png ## ## Selected background logo (96x1)/ Wallpaper (H1xx) on display ## CURRENT_LOGO defines if custom logo/wallpaper is selected for display. ## This is used to display custom logo/wallpaper or built in default logo/wallpaper is to be used. ## If CURRENT_LOGO is selected (not empty string), then the resource should be ## available using "LOGOS" configuration parameter. ## The CURRENT_LOGO configured in the settings file is used in the following cases: ## 1. The phone is not registered to Avaya Aura Session Manager ## 2. If the phone is registered to Avaya Aura Session Manager AND ## A. there is no information stored for the current logo file for this specific user (first time login of this user) ## AND ## B. there is no support of "Profile Settings" in the "Endpoint Template" (which is supported by SMGR 6.3.8 and up). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later. CURRENT_LOGO defines the administrator choice of wallpaper. SET CURRENT_LOGO=SEVERINDE ## ## Access privileges for Wallpaper configuration ## LOGOSTAT defines wallpaper configuration is allowed for administrators only or both users and administrators. ## Value Operation ## 0 Wallpaper configuration is defined according to CURRENT_LOGO only (CURRENT_LOGO can be defined by administrator only). Users are not allowed to change ## wallpaper configuration in the settings application. ## 1 The user is given an option to choose wallpaper in the settings application. By default, CURRENT_LOGO will be used but users can override this configuration. ## Once users override this configuration, CURRENT_LOGO will not be used unless the device return to factory defaults or LOGOSTAT is changed to 0 (default). ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later. ## SET LOGOSTAT 1 ## ## HOME_SCREEN_GRID_SIZE specifies the icon grid size in the home screen ## Value Operation ## 1 6x3 icons (width x height), Default. ## 2 4x2 icons (width x height) ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 and later. ## SET HOME_SCREEN_GRID_SIZE 2 ## ## ADMIN_INITIAL_SCREEN specifies whether home screen or phone screen is presented when all calls end or after login. This configuration is only ## enforced if "Screen presented when all calls end or after login" field (in the settings application --> Call settings menu) is configured as "Admin Default" (default). ## Value Operation ## HOMESCREEN Home screen is presented when all calls end or after login. ## PHONE Phone screen is presented when all calls end or after login (Default). ## Please note that if the screen before all call ends was NOT phone screen, then this parameter (including the field "Screen presented when all calls end or after login") ## will not have any effect since the user choose to work with other application (for example, browser) during the call and the preference is to avoid changing the screen in such case. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 and later. ## SET ADMIN_INITIAL_SCREEN HOMESCREEN ## ## EXTENSION_ON_TOP_LINE Specifies whether extension shall be displayed on top line or not. ## Value Operation ## 1 – Extension is NOT presented on the top line (default). ## 2 – Extension is presented on the top line. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.2 and later. ## SET EXTENSION_ON_TOP_LINE 2 ## ## Options Menu Display ## Determines whether Options & Settings menu is displayed ## on phone. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## SET PROVIDE_OPTIONS_SCREEN 1 ## ## Network Info Menu Display ## Determines whether Network Information menu is displayed ## on phone. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## SET PROVIDE_NETWORKINFO_SCREEN 1 ## ## Logout Enabled ## Determines whether user can log out from phone. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## SET PROVIDE_LOGOUT 1 ## Determines whether log out option is available or not in Avaya Menu options. ## #################### CALL LOG SETTINGS ################### ## ## Call Log Enabled ## Determines whether call logging and associated menus ## are available on the phone. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_CALL_LOG 1 ## ## Redial Enabled ## Determines whether redial softkey is available. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_REDIAL 1 ## ## Redial List Enabled ## Determines whether phone redials last number or ## displays list of recently dialed numbers. ## 0 for last number redial ## 1 user can select between last number redial and ## redial list SET ENABLE_REDIAL_LIST 1 ## #################### CONTACTS SETTINGS ################### ## ## Contacts Enabled ## Determines whether the contacts application and ## associated menus are available on the phone. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes ## Note: This parameter is also supported by H1xx R1.0.1 SIP and later, but it controls only ## the “Contacts” virtual button LED whether it is dimmed and pressing on it has no effect (ENABLE_CONTACTS==0) or ## whether “Contacts” virtual button LED is ON and pressing on it has effect (ENABLE_CONTACTS==1, default). SET ENABLE_CONTACTS 1 ## ## Contacts Modification Enabled ## Determines whether the list of contacts and ## the function of the contacts application can ## be modified on the phone. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_MODIFY_CONTACTS 1 ## ## Multiple Contacts Warning Display ## Determines whether a warning message is displayed if ## there are multiple devices registered on a user's ## behalf. Multiple registered devices may lead to ## service disruption. ## 0 for No ## 1 for Yes SET ENABLE_MULTIPLE_CONTACT_WARNING 1 ## #################### LANGUAGE SETTINGS #################### ## ## System-Wide Language ## Contains the name of the default system language file ## used in the phone. The filename should be one of the ## files listed in the LANGUAGES parameter. If no ## filename is specified, or if the filename does not ## match one of the LANGUAGES values, the phone shall use ## its built-in English text strings. 0 to 32 ASCII ## characters. Filename must end in .xml ## ## NOTE: ## For 96xx SIP Release 1.0 phones only, all language ## filenames begin with Mls_Spark_. For example, ## Mls_Spark_English.xml ## ## For 96xx SIP Release 2.0 and later and for 16CC phones, ## all language filenames begin with Mlf_ ## SET SYSTEM_LANGUAGE Mlf_German.xml ## ## The language files of 96x0 SIP 2.6.13 and later in the 96x0 SIP firmware distributions are different than 96x1 ## and therefore their filenames were changed to Mlf_S96x0_.xml. ## Mlf_.xml filename convention is used by: ## 1. 96x1 SIP Release 6.0 and later and ## 2. 96xx SIP Release 2.0 up to 2.6.13 (excluded). ## In mutual environment of 96x0 SIP and 96x1 SIP phones there shall be use of IF conditional statement ## base on MODEL/GROUP to assign different language files for each phone family. ## SET SYSTEM_LANGUAGE Mlf_English.xml ## SET SYSTEM_LANGUAGE Mlf_S96x0_English.xml ## ## Installed Languages ## Specifies the language files to be installed/downloaded ## to the phone. Filenames may be full URL, relative ## pathname, or filename. (0 to 1096 ASCII characters, ## including commas). Filenames must end in .xml. ## ## NOTE: ## For 96xx SIP Release 1.0 phones only, all language ## filenames begin with Mls_Spark_ For example, ## Mls_Spark_English.xml ## ## For 96xx SIP Release 2.0 and later and for 16CC phones, ## all language filenames begin with Mlf_ ## ## The language files of 96x0 SIP 2.6.13 and later in the 96x0 SIP firmware distributions are different than 96x1 ## and therefore their filenames were changed to Mlf_S96x0_.xml. ## Mlf_.xml filename convention is used by: ## 1. 96x1 SIP Release 6.0 and later and ## 2. 96xx SIP Release 2.0 up to 2.6.13 (excluded). ## In mutual environment of 96x0 SIP and 96x1 SIP phones there shall be use of IF conditional statement ## base on MODEL/GROUP to assign different language files for each phone family. ## SET LANGUAGES Mlf_German.xml,Mlf_English.xml ## SET LANGUAGES Mlf_S96x0_German.xml,Mlf_S96x0_ParisianFrench.xml,Mlf_S96x0_LatinAmericanSpanish.xml ## #################### ISO LANGUAGE SETTINGS #################### ## ## ISO System-Wide Language ## Contains the language and country codes for the administrator langauge choice ## until user changes the langugae using settings application. ## The language codes are two-letter lowercase ISO language codes (such as "en") ## as defined by ISO 639-1 (LL). The optional country codes (CC) are two-letter uppercase ## ISO country codes (such as "US") as defined by ISO 3166-1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later; supported values: en_AU, en_CA, en_IN, en_NZ, en_SG, en_GB, ## en_US,es_US, fr_BE, fr_CA, fr_FR, fr_CH, pt_BR, ru_RU ## SET ISO_SYSTEM_LANGUAGE en_AU ## #################### COUNTRY AND DATE SETTINGS #################### ## ## Call Progress Tone Country ## Country used for network call progress tones. ## For Argentina use keyword "Argentina" ## For Australia use keyword "Australia" ## For Brazil use keyword "Brazil" ## For Canada use keyword "USA" ## For France use keyword "France" ## For Germany use keyword "Germany" ## For Italy use keyword "Italy" ## For Ireland use keyword "Ireland" ## For Mexico use keyword "Mexico" ## For Spain use keyword "Spain" ## For United Kingdom use keyword "UK" ## For United States use keyword "USA" ## ## NOTE 1:For a complete list of supported countries, see your telephone's Administrators Guide. ## Note 2: Country names with spaces shall be enclosed in double quotes, as in: ## SET COUNTRY "Saudi Arabia" ## NOTE 3:This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phone models also. ## Note 4:This parameter is supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. For H1xx this parameter is used for ## country configuration for the following: ## a. Call Progress Tones, b. cordless handset, c. Wi-Fi and d. default anti-flickering ("50" or "60" Hz). ## This parameter MUST be configured for cordless handset operation (only certain countries ## are supported with cordless handset. Refer to Administrator guide for the full list). ## The default of this parameter is "Undefined" which means: ## a. Call progress Tones for "USA", b. Cordless handset is disabled, c. Wi-Fi is configured as WorldWide ## and d. "60 Hz" anti-flickering is used. ## SET COUNTRY Germany ## ## Date Format ## Specifies the format for dates displayed in the phone. ## Use %d for day of month ## Use %m for month in decimal format ## Use %y for year without century (e.g., 07) ## Use %Y for year with century (e.g., 2007) ## Any character not preceded by % is reproduced exactly. SET DATEFORMAT %d.%m.%y ## ## Time Format ## Specifies the format for time displayed in the phone. ## 0 for am/pm format ## 1 for 24h format ## Note: This parameter is supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. SET TIMEFORMAT 1 ## ## Daylight Savings Time Mode ## Specifies daylight savings time setting for phone. ## 0 for no daylight saving time ## 1 for daylight savings activated (time set to DSTOFFSET) ## 2 for automatic daylight savings adjustment (as ## specified by DSTSTART and DSTSTOP) ## Note: This parameter is supported by H1xx SIP R1.0 only (TIMEZONE shall be used in R1.0.0.1 and later). SET DAYLIGHT_SAVING_SETTING_MODE 2 ## ##################### PORT SETTINGS (SIP ONLY) ##################### ## ## UDP Minimum Port Value ## Specifies the lower limit of the UDP port range ## to be used by RTP/RTCP or SRTP/SRTCP connections. ## (1024 -65503). ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## Note: For H1xx SIP R1.0 and later the first half of the range is used for audio ## and the second half for video. ## SET RTP_PORT_LOW 5004 ## ## UDP Port Range ## Specifies the range or number of UDP ports ## available for RTP/RTCP or SRTP/SRTCP connections. ## This value is added to RTP_PORT_LOW to determine ## the upper limit of the UDP port range (32-64511). ## Note : This setting is applicable for 1603 SIP phones also. ## Note: For H1xx SIP R1.0 and later the first half of the range is used for audio ## and the second half for video. ## SET RTP_PORT_RANGE 40 ## ## Signaling Port Minimum Value ## Specifies the minimum port value for SIP ## signaling. ## (1024 -65503). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96xx SIP R2.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 1603 SIP ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SIG_PORT_LOW 1024 ## ## Signaling Port Range ## Specifies the range or number of SIP signaling ## ports. This value is added to SIG_PORT_LOW to ## determine the upper limit of the SIP signaling ## port range (32-64511). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96xx SIP R2.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 1603 SIP ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET SIG_PORT_RANGE 64511 ## ############################################################ ## ## 96xx/96x1/1603/H1xx SIP TELEPHONE SETTINGS ## ############################################################ ## ## INGRESS_DTMF_VOL_LEVEL specifies the power level of tone, expressed in dBm0. ## The possible values are in the range of -20dBm to -7dBm. ## The default value is -12dBm. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96xx SIP R2.0 and later ## 96x1 SIP R6.0 and later ## 1603 SIP ## H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## SET INGRESS_DTMF_VOL_LEVEL -12 ## ## CURRENT_CONTENT specifies the URL of an XML file that is used to customize the home screen. ## The default value of the parameter is null. ## This parameter is supported by 96x0 SIP R2.2 and later. ## SET CURRENT_CONTENT http://135.27.67.137/screen.xml ## ############################################# ## ## Conference transfer on primary appearence ## When CONF_TRANS_ON_PRIMARY_APPR is set to 1, ## conference and transfer setup will first attempt ## to use an idle primary call appearance even if ## initiated from a bridged call appearance. ## If an idle primary call appearance is not available, ## then an idle bridged call appearance will be used. ## Conference and transfer setup initiated from a bridged call ## appearance when no idle primary call appearance is available ## will next attempt to use an idle bridged call appearance of ## the same extension and if not available, an idle bridged call ## appearance of a different extension. ## Note: When CONF_TRANS_ON_PRIMARY_APPR is set to 1, AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR is ignored. ## ## When CONF_TRANS_ON_PRIMARY_APPR is set to 0, ## conference and transfer setup initiated from a primary call ## appearance will first attempt to use an idle primary call appearance. ## If an idle primary call appearance is not available, it will use an idle ## bridged call appearance regardless of the setting of AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR. ## Conference and transfer setup initiated from a bridged call appearance will attempt ## to use an idle bridged call appearance of the same extension. ## If an idle bridged call appearance of the same extension is not available ## and AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR is set to 1, then conference and transfer ## setup will use any idle call appearance (primary or bridged). ## It will first attempt to find an idle primary call appearance and if not ## available will then attempt to find an idle bridged call appearance of a different extension. ## However, if AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR is set to 0, transfer and conference setup ## initiated on a bridged call appearance will be denied if an idle bridged call appearance ## of the same extension is not available. ## ## The Default value of CONF_TRANS_ON_PRIMARY_APPR is 0. ## Note: These parameters are supported on SIP release R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones. ## ## Auto Select any idle appearance ## When AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR is active then any idle appearance is selected. ## When AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR is set to 0 and CONF_TRANS_ON_PRIMARY_APPR is 0, ## then if no associated call appearance is selected, ## the conference or transfer operation will be denied. ## When AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR is set to 1 and CONF_TRANS_ON_PRIMARY_APPR is 0, ## then if no associated call appearance is selected, the conference or transfer ## operation will be tried on any available call appearance (primary or bridged). ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later releases ## SET AUTO_SELECT_ANY_IDLE_APPR 0 ## ## EXTEND_RINGTONE provides a way to customize ring tone files. ## This is a comma separated list of file names in xml format. ## The default value of this parameter is null. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 SIP R2.4.1 and later releases ## SET EXTEND_RINGTONE "" ## ## Selection of Active Controller ## When FAILBACK_POLICY parameter is set to "auto", the phone's active controller will ## always be the highest priority available controller. ## If FAILBACK_POLICY parameter is set to "admin", ## then a controller lower down the priority list may be active. ## Note: This parameter is supported on R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones. ## The parameter is not supported on 96x1 R6.2 and later. ## SET FAILBACK_POLICY auto ## ## Dynamic Feature Set Discovery ## If the DISCOVER_AVAYA_ENVIRONMENT parameter value is 1, the phone discovers (determines) ## if that controller supports the AST feature set or not. The phone will send a SUBSCRIBE ## request to the active controller for the Feature Status Event Package (avaya-cm-feature-status). ## If the request succeeds, then the phone proceeds with PPM Synchronization. ## If the request is rejected, is proxied back to the phone or does not receive a response, ## the phone will assume that AST features are not available. ## If the parameter value is 0, the phone operates in a mode where AST features are not available. ## Note: This parameter is supported on R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones and H1xx SIP R1.0 and later. ## For IP office environment this parameter shall be set to 0. ## SET DISCOVER_AVAYA_ENVIRONMENT 1 ## ## Telephone number to call into the messaging system ## PSTN_VM_NUM is the "dialable" string is used to call into the messaging system ## (e.g. when pressing the Message Waiting button). ## Note: This parameter is supported on R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones and H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## when the phone is failed over. ## This parameter shall be used with IP Office environment instead of MSGNUM. ## SET PSTN_VM_NUM "" ## ## PSTN Access Prefix ## ENABLE_REMOVE_PSTN_ACCESS_PREFIX parameter allows telephone to ## perform digit manipulation during failure scenarios. This parameter ## allows removal of PSTN access prefix from the outgoing number. ## 0 - PSTN access prefix is retained in the outgoing number ## 1 - PSTN access prefix is stripped from the outgoing number. ## Note: This parameter is supported on R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones and H1xx SIP R1.0 and later ## when the phone is failed over. ## This parameter is not supported in IP Office environment as there is no support for failover. ## SET ENABLE_REMOVE_PSTN_ACCESS_PREFIX 0 ## ## Local Dial Area Code ## LOCAL_DIAL_AREA_CODE indicates whether user must dial area code for calls within same ## area code regions. when LOCAL_DIAL_AREA_CODE is enabled (1), the area code parameter (PHNLAC) ## should also be configured (ie. not the empty string). ## 0 - User don't need to dial area code. ## 1 - User need to dial area code. ## Note: This parameter is supported on R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones ## when the phone is failed over. ## SET LOCAL_DIAL_AREA_CODE 0 ## ## Phone's Local Area Code ## When PHNLAC is set,it indicates the telephone's local area code, which along with ## the parameter LOCAL_DIAL_AREA_CODE, allows users to dial local numbers with more flexibility. ## PHNLAC is a string representing the local area code the telephone. ## Note: This parameter is supported on R2.4.1 and later release of 96xx SIP telephones ## when the phone is failed over. ## SET PHNLAC "" ## ############################################################ ## ## SIP SOFTPHONE SETTINGS ## ############################################################ ## ## WEBLMSRVR sets the IP address or Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the Licensing Server. ## The default is null ("") but valid values are zero or more IP addresses in dotted-decimal or DNS format, ## separated by commas without intervening spaces, to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters. ## ## SP_DIRSRVR sets the IP address or Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the LDAP Directory Server. ## The default is null ("") but valid values are zero or more IP addresses in dotted-decimal or DNS format, ## separated by commas without intervening spaces, to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters. ## ## SP_DIRSRVRPORT sets the TCP port number of the LDAP Directory Server. ## The default port number is 389. ## ## SP_DIRTOPDN sets the Directory Topmost Distinguished Name. ## This value must be set to a non-null value to enable the LDAP application. ## The default is null (""), but DIRTOPDN should be set to the LDAP root entry. ## ## SP_AC sets the Area Code ## ## LOCAL_CALL_PREFIX sets the prefix for local calls. ## Permissible values are the Area Code denoted by AC, a string of digits, or the default, DIAL_AS_IS. ## The example below shows the Area Code. ## ## Examples: SET WEBLMSRVR 10.128.20.30 ## SET SP_DIRSRVR ldap-east.post.avaya.com ## SET SP_DIRSRVRPORT 389 ## SET SP_DIRTOPDN ou=People,o=avaya.com ## SET SP_AC 212 ## SET LOCAL_CALL_PREFIX AC ## ############################################################ ## # PRODUCT_LINE_SETTINGS ## ############################################################ IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1603 GOTO SETTINGS16XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1608 GOTO SETTINGS16XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1616 GOTO SETTINGS16XX ## Note that the 1692 and 16CC are not grouped with the 16xx telephones IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4601 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4602 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4610 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4620 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4621 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4622 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4625 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4630 GOTO SETTINGS46XX IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9610 GOTO SETTINGS96X0 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9620 GOTO SETTINGS96X0 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9630 GOTO SETTINGS96X0 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9640 GOTO SETTINGS96X0 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9650 GOTO SETTINGS96X0 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9670 GOTO SETTINGS96X0 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9608 GOTO SETTINGS96X1 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9611 GOTO SETTINGS96X1 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9621 GOTO SETTINGS96X1 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9641 GOTO SETTINGS96X1 ## Note that the 9601 is not grouped with the 96x1 telephones GOTO PER_MODEL_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS96X1 ## ########## Add settings for 96x1 telephones below ########## IF $SIG_IN_USE SEQ H323 GOTO SETTINGS96X1H323 ######## Add settings for 96x1 SIP telephones below ######## ## ## LANGLARGEFONT specifies the name of the language file for the display of large text. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results in the Text Size option not being offered. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 SIP R6.2 and later ## SET LANGLARGEFONT Mlf_Englarge.xml ## ###### End of 96x1 SIP product line-specific settings ###### GOTO PER_MODEL_SETTINGS # SETTINGS96X1H323 ####### Add settings for 96x1 H.323 telephones below ####### ## ## Note: Starting R6.6 release language file name convention was changed from “mlf_s96x1_...” to “mlf_96x1_...” ## In addition, the template English filename was changed from "..._template_english.txt to "..._template_en.txt". ## ## LANGSYS specifies the name of a language file to use for the default language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results in built-in English language strings being used. ## Note: User can also change the language using the field "Language..." in HOME-> Options & Settings-> Screen & Sound Options menu. ## LANGSYS will be enforced only on login screen or in case user did not change at all the field "Language..." value. ## Please note that user changes are stored in backup/restore file as LANGUSER (if BRURI has a valid value) which means that if the ## restored file include LANGUSER parameter then it will take precedence over LANGSYS. If BRURI is not valid, but user still change ## the content of "Language..." field, then user value will take precedence over LANGSYS (The only way to clear user configuration ## in this case is by doing: ## a. "CLEAR" operation in CRAFT menu, ## b. Logout (In this case the user configuration is not erased, but LANGSYS will be enforced). ## c. New user login. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## SET LANGSYS "" ## ## LANG1FILE specifies the name of the language file for the first user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## SET LANG1FILE mlf_96x1_v131_german.txt ## ## LANG2FILE specifies the name of the language file for the second user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## SET LANG2FILE mlf_96x1_v131_russian.txt ## ## LANG3FILE specifies the name of the language file for the third user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## SET LANG3FILE mlf_96x1_v131_spanish_latin.txt ## ## LANG4FILE specifies the name of the language file for the fourth user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.0 and later ## SET LANG4FILE mlf_96x1_v131_korean.txt ## ## LANGLARGEFONT specifies the name of the language file for the display of large text. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results in the Text Size option not being offered. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.1 and later ## SET LANGLARGEFONT mlf_96x1_v131_english_large.txt ## ## VOXFILES specifies a list of voice language files that determine the ## list of Voice Dialing Languages that is presented to the user. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## File names are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The first file in the list will be downloaded by default. ## The first three characters of the filename indicate the language supported as follows: ## DUN Dutch ## ENG U.K. English ## ENU U.S. English ## FRF Parisian French ## GED German ## ITI Italian ## PTB Brazilian Portuguese ## SPE European Spanish ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x1 H.323 R6.2 and subsequent dot releases, but not by R6.3 and later ## SET VOXFILES ENU_S20_FL_v1.tar,SPE_S20_FL_v1.tar,GED_S20_FL_v1.tar ## ##### End of 96x1 H.323 product line-specific settings ##### ## ################# END OF 96X1 SETTINGS ####################### GOTO PER_MODEL_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS96X0 ## ########## Add settings for 96x0 telephones below ########## ## ## LANGSYS specifies the name of a language file to use for the default language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results in built-in English language strings being used. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET LANGSYS "" ## ## LANG1FILE specifies the name of the language file for the first user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET LANG1FILE mlf_S31_v49_german.txt ## ## LANG2FILE specifies the name of the language file for the second user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET LANG2FILE mlf_S31_v49_russian.txt ## ## LANG3FILE specifies the name of the language file for the third user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET LANG3FILE mlf_S31_v49_spanish_latin.txt ## ## LANG4FILE specifies the name of the language file for the fourth user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET LANG4FILE mlf_S31_v49_korean.txt ## ## LANGLARGEFONT specifies the name of the language file for the display of large text. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results in the Text Size option not being offered. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET LANGLARGEFONT mlf_S31_v49_english_large.txt ## ## VOXFILES specifies a list of voice language files that determine the ## list of Voice Dialing Languages that is presented to the user. ## The list can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## File names are separated by commas without any intervening spaces. ## The first file in the list will be downloaded by default. ## The first three characters of the filename indicate the language supported as follows: ## DUN Dutch ## ENG U.K. English ## ENU U.S. English ## FRF Parisian French ## GED German ## ITI Italian ## PTB Brazilian Portuguese ## SPE European Spanish ## This parameter is supported by: ## 96x0 H.323 R2.0 and later ## SET VOXFILES ENU_S20_v3.tar,SPE_S20_v3.tar,GED_S20_v3.tar ## ######## End of 96x0 product line-specific settings ######## GOTO PER_MODEL_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS16XX ## ########## Add settings for 16xx telephones below ########## ## ## The following 10 predefined language files are supported by all 16xx H.323 software releases ## and don't require a font file. ## mlf_Sage_v54_dutch.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_french_can.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_french_paris.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_german.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_italian.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_japanese_kat.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_portuguese.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_russian.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_spanish.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_spanish_latin.txt ## ## The following 5 predefined language files supported by 16xx H.323 R1.1 and later software releases ## also require a font file, but only one font file may be downloaded, ## so at most one of these language files should be specified. ## mlf_Sage_v54_arabic.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_chinese.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_trad_chinese.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_hebrew.txt ## mlf_Sage_v54_korean.txt ## ## The font files for the 5 languages above are as follows, in the same order: ## Arabic_S11_V34.rbm.lzma ## GB_S11_V34.rbm.lzma ## Big5_S11_V34.rbm.lzma ## Hebrew_S11_V34.rbm.lzma ## KSC_S11_V34.rbm.lzma ## ## LANGSYS specifies the name of a language file to use for the default language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results in built-in English language strings being used. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LANGSYS "" ## ## LANG1FILE specifies the name of the language file for the first user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LANG1FILE mlf_Sage_v54_german.txt ## ## LANG2FILE specifies the name of the language file for the second user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LANG2FILE mlf_Sage_v54_russian.txt ## ## LANG3FILE specifies the name of the language file for the third user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LANG3FILE mlf_Sage_v54_spanish_latin.txt ## ## LANG4FILE specifies the name of the language file for the fourth user-selectable language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no user-selectable language for this parameter. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.0 and later ## SET LANG4FILE mlf_Sage_v54_korean.txt ## ## FONTFILE specifies the name of a font file to use for a non-Latin based language. ## The file name can contain 0-32 ASCII characters. ## The default value is null, which results no font file being downloaded. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16xx H.323 R1.1 and later ## SET FONTFILE KSC_S11_V34.rbm.lzma ## ######## End of 16xx product line-specific settings ######## GOTO PER_MODEL_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS46XX ## ########## Add settings for 46xx telephones below ########## ## ## ################# END OF 46XX SETTINGS ####################### GOTO PER_MODEL_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # PER_MODEL_SETTINGS ## ############################################################## IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1603 GOTO SETTINGS1603 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1608 GOTO SETTINGS1608 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1616 GOTO SETTINGS1616 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1692 GOTO SETTINGS1692 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 16CC GOTO SETTINGS16CC IF $MODEL4 SEQ 3631 GOTO SETTINGS3631 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 364X GOTO SETTINGS364X IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4601 GOTO SETTINGS4601 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4602 GOTO SETTINGS4602 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4610 GOTO SETTINGS4610 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4620 GOTO SETTINGS4620 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4621 GOTO SETTINGS4621 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4622 GOTO SETTINGS4622 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4625 GOTO SETTINGS4625 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 4630 GOTO SETTINGS4630 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9610 GOTO SETTINGS9610 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9620 GOTO SETTINGS9620 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9630 GOTO SETTINGS9630 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9640 GOTO SETTINGS9640 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9650 GOTO SETTINGS9650 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9670 GOTO SETTINGS9670 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9601 GOTO SETTINGS9601 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9608 GOTO SETTINGS9608 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9611 GOTO SETTINGS9611 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9621 GOTO SETTINGS9621 IF $MODEL4 SEQ 9641 GOTO SETTINGS9641 IF $MODEL4 SEQ H175 GOTO SETTINGSH175 GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS1603 ## ########## Add settings for 1603 telephones below ########## ## ## ############# End of 1603 model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS1608 ## ########## Add settings for 1608 telephones below ########## ## ## ############# End of 1608 model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################ ## # SETTINGS1616 ## ########## Add settings for 1616 telephones below ########## ## ## ############# End of 1616 model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS1692 ## ########## Add settings for 1692 telephones below ########## ## ## SYSLANG specifies the local display language for the 1692 telephone. ## For English use a value of "English" ## For Canadian French use a value of "French_Canada" ## For Parisian French use a value of "French_France" ## For German use a value of "German" ## For Spanish use a value of "Spanish" ## For Italian use a value of "Italian" ## For Russian use a value of "Russian" ## For Simplified Chinese use a value of "Chinese" ## For Japanese use a value of "Japanese" ## For Portuguese use a value of "Portuguese" ## SET SYSLANG English ## ################## GRATUITOUS ARP SETTING ################## ## ## GARPSTAT specifies whether gratuitous ARP messages may be used for duplicate IP address detection. ## Value Operation ## 0 Use gratuitous ARP messages for duplicate IP address detection (default) ## 1 Do not use gratuitous ARP messages for duplicate IP address detection ## This parameter is supported by: ## 1692 H.323 R1.3 and later ## SET GARPSTAT 1 ## ############# End of 1692 model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS16CC ## ########## Add settings for 16CC telephones below ########## ## ## AGENTTONE specifies the confirmation tone to play when the agent successfully logs in. ## Valid values are 1-32; the default value is 1. ## This parameter is supported by: ## 16CC SIP R1.0 and later ## SET AGENTTONE 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 one level softer than NORMAL ## 2 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 3 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 4 OFF (inaudible) ## 5 one level louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ############# End of 16CC model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################ ## # SETTINGS3631 ## ############################################################ ## ## WMM mode for 3631 telephone. May be overridden by WMM ## mode specified in Access Profile. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTWMM 0 ## ## Power save mode for 3631 telephone. May be overridden ## by power save mode specified in Access Profile. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTPWRSAV 1 ## ## TRUSTCERTS specifies a list of names of files that contain copies ## of CA certificates (in PEM format) that will be downloaded and used ## to authenticate received server certificates for each profile as ## indicated below. Note that the 3631 requires that specific file names ## be used as specified below, which is a difference from the operation ## of other telephone models. ## cacert1.pem for 3631 Access Profile 1 ## cacert2.pem for 3631 Access Profile 2 ## cacert3.pem for 3631 Access Profile 3 ## SET TRUSTCERTS cacert1.pem,cacert2.pem,cacert3.pem ## ## Regulatory domain (country) for 3631 telephone. (0 to ## 2 ASCII characters, no spaces.) ## SET WTREGDOM US ## ## Data rate for 3631 telephone ## -1 for Auto ## 2 for 1 Mbps ## 4 for 2 Mbps ## 11 for 5.5 Mbps ## 12 for 6 Mbps ## 18 for 9 Mbps ## 22 for 11 Mbps ## 24 for 12 Mbps ## 36 for 18 Mbps ## 48 for 24 Mbps ## 72 for 36 Mbps ## 96 for 48 Mbps ## 108 for 54 Mbps ## SET WTRATE -1 ## ## Fragmentation threshold for 3631 telephone (256-3000). ## SET WTFRAG 3000 ## ## Request to send (RTS) threshold for 3631 telephone ## (0-3000). ## SET WTRTS 3000 ## ################ ACCESS PROFILE 1 SETTINGS ############### ## ## Name for Access Profile 1. (0 to 31 ASCII characters, ## no spaces.) ## SET WTPROF1 North ## ## SSID for Access Profile 1. (0 to 31 ASCII characters, ## no spaces.) ## SET WTSSIDP1 north@mycompany ## ## WMM mode for Access Profile 1. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTWMMP1 0 ## ## Power save mode for Access Profile 1. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTPWRSAVP1 1 ## ## Security mode for Access Profile 1. ## 0 for none ## 1 for WEP ## 2 for WPA-PSK ## 3 for WPA2-PSK ## 4 for WPA-802.1X ## 5 for WPA2-802.1X ## SET WTSECP1 0 ## ## Encryption type for Access Profile 1. ## 0 for none ## 1 for WEP-64 ## 2 for WEP-128 ## 3 for TKIP ## 4 for AES ## SET ENCRYPTP1 0 ## ## Encryption key for Access Profile 1. (0 to 63 ASCII ## characters, no spaces.) ## SET WTKEYP1 northkey ## ## EAP type for Access Profile 1. ## 0 for disable ## 1 for TLS ## 2 for LEAP ## 3 for PEAP-GTC ## 4 for PEAP-MSCHAPV2 ## 5 for TTLS-CHAP ## 6 for TTLS-MD5 ## 7 for TTLS-MSCHAP ## 8 for TTLS-MSCHAPV2 ## SET EAPTYPEP1 0 ## ################ ACCESS PROFILE 2 SETTINGS ############### ## ## Name for Access Profile 2. (0 to 31 ASCII characters, ## no spaces.) ## SET WTPROF2 South ## ## SSID for Access Profile 2. (0 to 31 ASCII characters, ## no spaces.) ## SET WTSSIDP2 south@mycompany ## ## WMM mode for Access Profile 2. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTWMMP2 0 ## ## Power save mode for Access Profile 2. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTPWRSAVP2 1 ## ## Security mode for Access Profile 2. ## 0 for none ## 1 for WEP ## 2 for WPA-PSK ## 3 for WPA2-PSK ## 4 for WPA-802.1X ## 5 for WPA2-802.1X ## SET WTSECP2 0 ## ## Encryption type for Access Profile 2. ## 0 for none ## 1 for WEP-64 ## 2 for WEP-128 ## 3 for TKIP ## 4 for AES ## SET ENCRYPTP2 0 ## ## Encryption key for Access Profile 2. (0 to 63 ASCII ## characters, no spaces.) ## SET WTKEYP2 southkey ## ## EAP type for Access Profile 2. ## 0 for disable ## 1 for TLS ## 2 for LEAP ## 3 for PEAP-GTC ## 4 for PEAP-MSCHAPV2 ## 5 for TTLS-CHAP ## 6 for TTLS-MD5 ## 7 for TTLS-MSCHAP ## 8 for TTLS-MSCHAPV2 ## SET EAPTYPEP2 0 ## ## Domain Name Server for Access Profile 2 ## SET DNSSRVRP2 198.152.20.15 ## ## DNS domain for Access Profile 2 ## SET DOMAINP2 south.mycompany.com ## ################ ACCESS PROFILE 3 SETTINGS ############### ## ## Name for Access Profile 3. (0 to 31 ASCII characters, ## no spaces.) ## SET WTPROF3 West ## ## SSID for Access Profile 3. (0 to 31 ASCII characters, ## no spaces.) ## SET WTSSIDP3 west@mycompany ## ## WMM mode for Access Profile 3. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTWMMP3 0 ## ## Power save mode for Access Profile 3. ## 0 for off ## 1 for on ## SET WTPWRSAVP3 1 ## ## Security mode for Access Profile 3. ## 0 for none ## 1 for WEP ## 2 for WPA-PSK ## 3 for WPA2-PSK ## 4 for WPA-802.1X ## 5 for WPA2-802.1X ## SET WTSECP3 0 ## ## Encryption type for Access Profile 3. ## 0 for none ## 1 for WEP-64 ## 2 for WEP-128 ## 3 for TKIP ## 4 for AES ## SET ENCRYPTP3 0 ## ## Encryption key for Access Profile 3. (0 to 63 ASCII ## characters, no spaces.) ## SET WTKEYP3 westkey ## ## EAP type for Access Profile 3. ## 0 for disable ## 1 for TLS ## 2 for LEAP ## 3 for PEAP-GTC ## 4 for PEAP-MSCHAPV2 ## 5 for TTLS-CHAP ## 6 for TTLS-MD5 ## 7 for TTLS-MSCHAP ## 8 for TTLS-MSCHAPV2 ## SET EAPTYPEP3 0 ## ## Domain Name Server for Access Profile 3 ## SET DNSSRVRP3 198.152.25.15 ## ## DNS domain for Access Profile 3 ## SET DOMAINP3 west.mycompany.com ## ############# End of 3631 model-specific settings ########## GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################ ## # SETTINGS364X ## ############################################################ ## ## PPM_ENABLE specifies whether limited PPM support for remote maintenance via ## System Manager (reboot & SNMP enable/disable) will be enabled or disabled. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## This parameter is supported by: ## 364x SIP R1.1 and later ## SET PPM_ENABLE 1 ## ## Daylight saving time rules ## Set of daylight saving time rules. ## none - No daylight saving time or manual adjustment of ## time zone ## usa - US American daylight time saving rules ## aus - Australian daylight saving rules (most states) ## euro - European daylight saving time rules ## SET DSTADJUST none ## ## TFTP-Server used as fallback in case of no HTTP-Server ## being available. Give IP-Address or "" for none. ## SET TFTPSRVR "" ## ## AVPP-Server (or SVP-Server) used for SVP QoS over WLAN. ## Give IP-Address or "" for none. ## SET SVPSRVR "" ## ## Enable or disable OAI support for 3rd-party application ## 0 for disable ## 1 for enable ## SET OAI_ENABLE 1 ## ## OAI-Server to add 3rd-party applications. ## Give IP-Address or "" for none. ## SET OAISRVR "" ## ## DSCP_OTHER Sets the DiffServ value for any other traffic ## than audio streams or call signalling. The default is 0 ## and valid values are 0-63. ## SET DSCP_OTHER 0 ## ## Enable or disable diagnostic screens during call. With ## enabled diagnostic screens, users will not be able to ## navigate between calls. ## 0 for disable ## 1 for enable ## SET DIAG_DISPLAY_ENABLE 0 ## ## Set Syslog level for syslog messages sent to server ## configured using parameter LOGSRVR. Allowed values: ## disabled, errors, event, full ## SET SYSLOG_MODE disabled ## ## Phone behavior in case of detecting a critical error ## halt to display an error message until phone is ## switched off by user ## restart to display an error message shortly before ## automatic restart ## SET ERROR_HANDLING restart ## ## Enable or disable support for Real-Time-Location-System ## (Ekahau RTLS). ## 0 for disable ## 1 for enable ## SET RTLS_ENABLE 0 ## ## Set IP-Address of RTLS server ## SET RTLSSRVR "" ## ## Set IP Port for messages to RTLS server (1-65535) ## The default is 8552. ## SET RTLS_PORT 8552 ## ## Set time intervall of RTLS location updates. Values: ## 15sec, 30sec, 1min, 5min, 10min ## SET RTLS_INTERVAL 10min ## ## Select function of big button on left side of 3645, not ## applicable to 3641. ## ptt for Push-To-Talk (PTT) ## emergency_dial for emergency dialing ## none for no function ## SET PTT_OR_EMERGENCY_DIAL none ## ## Set name matching to emergency number. (The emergency ## number is configured in common section of this file) ## This can be from 1-16 characters. Valid characters are ## A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, and the following: *.-_!$%&'()+,:;/\=@~# ## ## SET PHNEMERGNAME "Emergency Center" ## ###################### PTT settings ###################### ## ## Set list of PTT channels available to the user. Comma- ## separated list of numbers from 1 to 24. ## SET PTT_CHANNELS 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24 ## ## Set names of PTT channels ## This can be from 1-16 characters. Valid characters are ## A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, and the following: *.-_!$%&'()+,:;/\=@~# ## Use NULL ("") to clear these. ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_01 "PTT Channel 01" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_02 "PTT Channel 02" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_03 "PTT Channel 03" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_04 "PTT Channel 04" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_05 "PTT Channel 05" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_06 "PTT Channel 06" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_07 "PTT Channel 07" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_08 "PTT Channel 08" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_09 "PTT Channel 09" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_10 "PTT Channel 10" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_11 "PTT Channel 11" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_12 "PTT Channel 12" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_13 "PTT Channel 13" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_14 "PTT Channel 14" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_15 "PTT Channel 15" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_16 "PTT Channel 16" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_17 "PTT Channel 17" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_18 "PTT Channel 18" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_19 "PTT Channel 19" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_20 "PTT Channel 20" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_21 "PTT Channel 21" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_22 "PTT Channel 22" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_23 "PTT Channel 23" ## SET PTT_CH_NAME_24 "PTT Channel 24" ## ## Enable or disable the PTT Priority Channel ## 0 for disable ## 1 for enable ## SET PTT_PRIORITY_CH_ENABLE 0 ## ## Set name of PTT priority channel ## This can be from 1-16 characters. Valid characters are ## A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, and the following: *.-_!$%&'()+,:;/\=@~# ## Use NULL ("") to clear these. ## SET PTT_PRIORITY_CH_NAME "Priority PTT" ## ##################### SIP settings (364X) ####################### ## ## Configure up to 6 Usernames and Passwords to be used ## for SIP Authentications. Usernames are often identical ## to extension numbers. ## SIP_USERNAME1 and SIP_PASSWORD1 replace username and ## password entered by user (if these are set, the user ## will not be prompted for these on power cycle). ## This can be from 1-16 characters. Valid characters are ## A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, and the following: *.-_!$%&'()+,:;/\=@~# ## Use NULL ("") to clear these. ## These parameters are typically defined in the phone ## specific configuration file. ## SET SIP_USERNAME1 4711 ## SET SIP_PASSWORD1 1174 ## SET SIP_USERNAME2 4712 ## SET SIP_PASSWORD2 2174 ## SET SIP_USERNAME3 4713 ## SET SIP_PASSWORD3 3174 ## SET SIP_USERNAME4 4714 ## SET SIP_PASSWORD4 4174 ## SET SIP_USERNAME5 4715 ## SET SIP_PASSWORD5 5174 ## SET SIP_USERNAME6 4716 ## SET SIP_PASSWORD6 6174 ## ## SIP Line Configuration - Extensions. Configure Extensions for up to 5 Lines. ## 1-16 alphanumeric characters, no spaces. ## Use NULL ("") to clear these. ## These parameters are typically defined in the phone specific configuration file. ## SET SIP_LINE1 4711 ## SET SIP_LINE2 4711 ## SET SIP_LINE3 4711 ## SET SIP_LINE4 4712 ## SET SIP_LINE5 4713 ## ## SIP Line Configuration - Call IDs. ## The Call ID is displayed at the remote phone during a call. ## Note that this may be changed to different values by SIP Proxies. ## Up to 18 characters, "" (null) is allowed. ## These parameters are typically defined in the phone specific configuration file. ## SET SIP_LINE_CALLID1 "4711 Miller" ## SET SIP_LINE_CALLID2 "4711 Miller" ## SET SIP_LINE_CALLID3 "4711 Miller" ## SET SIP_LINE_CALLID4 "4712 Smith" ## SET SIP_LINE_CALLID5 "4713 Johnson" ## ## Define supported codecs and preferred order. ## Comma-separated list of following values: g711u, g711a, g729 ## SET CODEC_LIST g711a,g711u ## ## Configure how to implement DTMF dialing. ## 1 for in-band signalling ## 2 for signalling according to RFC2833 ## SET SEND_DTMF_TYPE 1 ## ## Enable or Disable sending of SIP INFO requests for ## key press events. ## 0 for disable ## 1 for enable ## SET SIP_SEND_INFO 0 ## ## Enable or Disable support of SIP Provisional ## Acknowledgements (PRACK Requests) ## 0 for disable ## 1 for enable ## SET SIP_PRACKING 0 ## ## Configure SIP Keepalive interval in seconds. ## Keepalives are SIP OPTION requests sent to the proxy server. ## 10 to 3600 or 0 to not send keepalives ## SET SIP_KEEPALIVE_INTERVAL 0 ## ## Configure whether phone may use the same Call-ID header ## for different lines or must use a unique Call-ID per ## line. ## 0 for same Call-ID allowed for different line ## 1 for different Call-ID required per line ## SET SIP_CALLID_PER_LINE 0 ## ## Set Favorites as comma-separated list of "number";"name" pairs. ## See admin guide for details. Up to 15 favorites may be set. ## Any favorites defined after 15 will be ignored. ## The entire line can be up to 300 characters. ## "" (null) may be used to indicate no favorites. ## No spaces are allowed in this specification unless inside a quoted string. ## SET SIP_FAVORITES 1231;Favorite1,1232;Favorite2,1233;Favorite3,1234;Favorite4 ## ## Specifies the number to be dialed to subscribe for mail center notifications. ## This can be up to 50 characters, no spaces. ## SET SIP_MAIL_SUBSCR 4567 ## ############################################################ ## WLAN settings ## ## Includes Security Critical data - check admin guide ## ## for other configuration options. ## ## IMPORTANT NOTE: ## ## These parameters should always be specified in the ## ## order in which they appear here since some are ## ## dependent on others. ## ############################################################ ## ## SSID of WLAN network to be used. ## String of up to 32 characters. ## SET WLAN_ESSID mywlan ## ## WLAN network uses CCX (Cisco Compatible Extensions) ## 0 for custom (no CCX) ## 1 for CCX ## SET WLAN_USE_CCX 0 ## ## WLAN Quality of Service ## svp for Spectralink Voice Priority ## wifiStandard for WiFi standard QoS (WMM) ## SET WLAN_QOS_TYPE svp ## ## WLAN Call Admission Control (CAC) for WiFi standard QoS ## mandatory for CAC required to be enabled in AP ## optional for CAC optional to be enabled in AP ## SET WMM_ACCESS_CONTROL mandatory ## ## WLAN Security Standard used ## none for no security ## wep for WEP security ## wpa2psk for WPA2 security with pre-shared key ## wpapsk for WPA security wit pre-shared key ## fsr for Cisco Fast Secure Roaming ## wpa2e for WPA2 Enterprise security (802.1x auth.) ## SET WLAN_SECURITY none ## ############ Settings applying to WEP security only ##### ## ## WEP authentication used ## openSystem for WEP open systems ## sharedKey for WEP with shared key authentication ## SET WEP_AUTHENTICATION openSystem ## ## Index of WEP default key, range 1-4 ## SET WEP_DEFAULT_KEY 1 ## ## Length of WEP key ## 40bit for WEP keys of 40 bits ## 128bit for WEP keys of 128 bits ## SET WEP_KEY_LEN 128bit ## ## WEP Keys 1 to 4, default not set ## 10 hex digits for 40 bit keys, 26 hex digits for ## 128 bit keys ## Set to "" to erase any previously set value ## SET WEP_KEY1 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789 ## SET WEP_KEY2 123456789ABCDEF01234567890 ## SET WEP_KEY3 23456789ABCDEF012345678901 ## SET WEP_KEY4 3456789ABCDEF0123456789012 ## ###### Settings applying to WPA/WPA2 with pre-shared key only #### ## ## Create PSK from passphrase or enter PSK directly ## passphrase for generation from passphrase and SSID ## psk for direct input of pre-shared key ## Set to "" to erase any previously set value ## SET WPA_TYPE passphrase ## ## WPA(2) passphrase, up to 63 characters ## Illegal Characters: ASCII 34("), ASCII 63(?), ASCII 96(`) ## Set to "" to erase any previously set value ## SET WPA_PASSPHRASE MyWPAPassphrase ## ## WPA(2) pre-shared key, 64 hex digits ## Set to "" to erase any previously set value ## SET WPA_PSK 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF ## ############## Settings applying to WPA2 Enterprise (802.1x) only ####### ## ## WPA2 Enterprise authentication method ## eapfast for EAP-FAST ## peap for PEAPv0/MSCHAPv2 ## SET WPA2E_AUTH eapfast ## ## WPA2 Enterprise fast handoff algorithm ## cckm for Cisco Centralized Key Management ## okc for Opportunistic Key Caching ## SET WPA2E_FAST_HANDOFF cckm ## ## WPA2 Enterprise Username for WLAN authentication ## This can be from 1-32 characters. Valid characters are ## A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, and the following: *.-_!$%&'()+,:;/\=@~# ## Set to "" to erase any previously set value ## SET WLAN_SEC_USERNAME myUsername ## ## WPA2 Enterprise password for WLAN authentication ## This can be from 1-32 characters. Valid characters are ## A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, and the following: *.-_!$%&'()+,:;/\=@~# ## Set to "" to erase any previously set value ## SET WLAN_SEC_PASSWORD myPassword ## ## PAC-File for EAP-FAST authentication, up to 32 chars ## WLAN_SEC_USERNAME and WLAN_SEC_PASSWORD must be set ## correctly in order to decode the PAC file prior to saving ## it in handset memory. These credentials must match both ## the PAC file and authentication to the Radius server. ## Set to "" to delete PAC file. ## Note: If PAC file was enrolled using Handset Administration Tool (HAT), ## it must be revoked using HAT to delete it. ## SET PAC_FILENAME myPACFile.pac ## ## Server Certificate for PEAP authentication, only ## DER format supported - up to 32 characters ## Set to "" to delete certificate file. ## Note: If certificate file was enrolled using Handset Administration Tool (HAT), ## it must be revoked using HAT to delete it. ## SET SERVER_CERT_FILENAME myCertificate.der ## ############# WLAN radio settings ###################### ## ## WLAN radio mode selection ## a for operation in 802.11a networks ## b&b/g for operation in 802.11b or mixed b/g networks ## g for operation in pure 802.11g networks ## SET WLAN_RADIO_MODE b&b/g ## ## Enabled Sub-Bands for 802.11a radio, applying to 802.11a mode only. ## Comma-separated list of values 1-6 representing the following subbands: ## 1 5.150-5.250 ## 2 5.250-5.350 DFS ## 3 5.470-5.725 DFS ## 4 5.725-5.825 ## 5 5.725-5.850 ## 6 5.470-5.650 DFS ## Subbands not allowed in configured regulatory domain ## will be ignored - see admin guide for details. ## SET WLAN_A_SUBBANDS 1,2,3,4,5,6 ## ## WLAN transmit power configuration for all 6 a-radio sub-bands and for b/g-radio, ## only applying for enabled radio/sub-bands. ## Allowed values: 5mW, 10mW, 20mW, 30mW, 40mW, 50mW, 100mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_A1 30mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_A2 30mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_A3 30mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_A4 30mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_A5 30mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_A6 30mW ## SET WLAN_TX_POWER_BG 30mW ## ############# End of 364X model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4601 ## ########## Add settings for 4601 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ############# End of 4601 model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4602 ## ########## Add settings for 4602 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ############# End of 4602 model-specific settings ############ GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4610 ## ########## Add settings for 4610 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 4610 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4620 ## ########## Add settings for 4620 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 4620 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4621 ## ########## Add settings for 4621 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 4621 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4622 ## ########## Add settings for 4622 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############# End of 4622 model-specific settings ########## GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4625 ## ########## Add settings for 4625 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 4625 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS4630 ## ########## Add settings for 4630 telephones below ########## ## ###### Settings for the 4630 IP Phone LDAP Application ##### ## ## These settings are used to enable and administer the LDAP ## application on the 4630. ## ## DIRSRVR specifies the LDAP Directory server address. ## This value must be set to a non-null value to enable the LDAP application. ## The default is null ("") but valid values are zero or more IP addresses ## in dotted-decimal or DNS format, separated by commas without intervening spaces, ## to a maximum of 255 ASCII characters. ## SET DIRSRVR ldap.mycompany.com ## ## DIRLDAPPORT specifies the TCP port number of the LDAP Directory Server. ## The default port number is 389. ## SET DIRLDAPPORT 389 ## ## DIRTOPDN specifies the Directory Topmost Distinguished Name. ## This value must be set to a non-null value to enable the LDAP application. ## The default is null ("") but this should be set to the LDAP root entry. ## SET DIRTOPDN People ## ## DIRFULLNAME specifies the default LDAP search value. ## The 4630 only supports searches on names. ## The default is "cn" which stands for "complete name" in LDAP. ## Changing this value is not recommended unless the LDAP directory ## uses a different term for this data field. ## SET DIRFULLNAME cn ## ## DIRTELNUM specifies the Directory Telephone Number field. ## The default is "telephonenumber". ## Changing this value is not recommended unless the LDAP directory ## uses a different term for this data field. ## SET DIRTELNUM telephonenumber ## ######## Settings for 4630 IP Phone Web Application ######## ## ## These settings are used to enable and administer the Web ## application on the 4630. ## ## NOTE: Avaya hosts a web site for the 4630 IP Phone. ## The WEBHOME and WEBCODING parameters are set up ## to point your 4630 IP telephones to this hosted site. ## To enable this operation, remove "##" from the front ## of the lines SET WEBHOME ... (and you may need to ## administer WEBPROXY as well). ## To change the web site that your phones point to, ## remove "##" from the front of the lines SET WEBHOME ... ## and replace the provided URL with the URL of your site. ## ## NOTE: Your network must be using Domain Name Services ## (DNS) for the Avaya hosted site settings to operate properly. ## ## The URL of your 4630 Home page ## The default is null ("") but you can specify any other ## valid URL up to 255 characters in length. ## SET WEBHOME http://support.avaya.com/elmodocs2/avayaip/4630/index.htm ## ## Your HTTP proxy server address (name or IP address) ## This text string contains zero or one IP address in ## dotted-decimal or DNS format, identifying an HTTP Proxy ## Server. The default is null ("") and you may not need ## to set this parameter if all Web pages to be viewed by ## the phone user are on your organization's intranet. ## SET WEBPROXY my.proxy.company.com ## ## The TCP port number of your HTTP proxy server ## The default is 80, but WEBPORT is ignored if WEBPROXY ## is null. ## SET WEBPORT 80 ## ## A list of one or more HTTP proxy server exception ## domains. Accesses to these addresses will not go ## through the proxy server. The default is null ("") ## but valid values are zero or more IP addresses in ## dotted-decimal or DNS format, separated by commas ## without intervening spaces, to a maximum of 255 ASCII ## characters. ## SET WEBEXCEPT mycompany.com,135.20.21.20 ## ##################### 4630 Stock Ticker ###################### ## ## STKSTAT specifies operation of the stock ticker application. ## Value Operation ## 0 Disabled ## 1 Enabled (default) ## SET STKSTAT 1 ## ############## End of 4630 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9610 ## ########## Add settings for 9610 telephones below ########## ## ## Handset Sidetone ## Controls the level of sidetone in the handset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## ## SET AUDIOSTHS 0 ## ############## 9610 WML BROWSER SETTINGS ################ ## ## WMLSMALL specifies the URL of a WML page that will be rendered by the 9610 WML browser ## after the number of minutes of idle time specified by WMLIDLETIME ## if the value of IDLEAPP (specified in the 9610 backup/restore file) is null. ## If the values of WMLSMALL and IDLEAPP are both null, the Avaya one-X(TM) screen saver ## will be displayed after the number of minutes of idle time specified by WMLIDLETIME. ## ## SET WMLSMALL http://www.mycompany.com/my_screen.wml ## ############## End of 9610 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9620 ## ########## Add settings for 9620 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ############### 9620 PROGRESS TONE LEVELS ################ ## ## These parameters are supported by 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later releases. ## ## Headset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the headset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HEADSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Handset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the handset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HANDSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Speaker Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the speaker. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_SPEAKER_LEVEL 0 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9620 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9630 ## ########## Add settings for 9630 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ############### 9630 PROGRESS TONE LEVELS ################ ## ## These parameters are supported by 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later releases. ## ## Headset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the headset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HEADSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Handset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the handset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HANDSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Speaker Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the speaker. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_SPEAKER_LEVEL 0 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9630 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9640 ## ########## Add settings for 9640 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ############### 9640 PROGRESS TONE LEVELS ################ ## ## These parameters are supported by 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later releases. ## ## Headset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the headset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HEADSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Handset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the handset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HANDSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Speaker Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the speaker. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_SPEAKER_LEVEL 0 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9640 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9650 ## ########## Add settings for 9650 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ############### 9650 PROGRESS TONE LEVELS ################ ## ## These parameters are supported by 96x0 SIP R2.6.5 and later releases. ## ## Headset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the headset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HEADSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Handset Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the handset. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## 6 nominal value 18 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_HANDSET_LEVEL 0 ## ## Speaker Progress tone adjust ## Controls the level of progress tones in the speaker. ## ## setting level ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 nominal value 3 dB louder than default value ## 2 nominal value 6 dB louder than default value ## 3 nominal value 9 dB louder than default value ## 4 nominal value 12 dB louder than default value ## 5 nominal value 15 dB louder than default value ## ## SET NETWORK_PROGRESS_TONE_SPEAKER_LEVEL 0 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9650 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9670 ## ########## Add settings for 9670 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9670 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9601 ## ########## Add settings for 9601 telephones below ########## ## ## ############## End of 9601 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9608 ## ########## Add settings for 9608 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9608 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9611 ## ########## Add settings for 9611 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9611 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9621 ## ########## Add settings for 9621 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9621 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGS9641 ## ########## Add settings for 9641 telephones below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ## WMLHOME specifies the URL of a WML page to be displayed by default in the WML browser, ## and whenever the Home softkey is selected in the browser. ## The value can contain zero or one URL of up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## If the value is null, the WML browser will be disabled. ## SET WMLHOME http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/home.wml ## ## WMLIDLEURI specifies zero or one URL for a WML page to be displayed when the telephone ## has been idle for the number of minutes specified by the value of WMLIDLETIME. ## The value can contain up to 255 characters; the default value is null (""). ## SET WMLIDLEURI http://www.myco.com/ipphoneapps/idlepage.wml ## ############## End of 9641 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # SETTINGSH175 ## ########## Add settings for H175 Video Collaboration Station below ########## ## ## AUDIOSTHS specifies the level of sidetone in the handset. The sidetone level adjustment ## provided by the AUDIOSTHS parameter is applicable to both wired and DECT handsets. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET AUDIOSTHS 1 ## ## AUDIOSTHD specifies the level of sidetone in the headset. ## Value Operation ## 0 NORMAL level for most users (default) ## 1 three levels softer than NORMAL ## 2 OFF (inaudible) ## 3 one level softer than NORMAL ## 4 two levels softer than NORMAL ## 5 four levels softer than NORMAL ## 6 five levels softer than NORMAL ## 7 six levels softer than NORMAL ## 8 one level louder than NORMAL ## 9 two levels louder than NORMAL ## This parameter is supported by: ## H1xx SIP R1.0.1 and later ## SET AUDIOSTHD 1 ## ############## End of H175 model-specific settings ########### GOTO GROUP_SETTINGS ############################################################## ## # GROUP_SETTINGS ## ############################################################## ## ## Parameter values can be set for specifically-designated groups of ## telephones by using IF statements based on the GROUP parameter. ## ## The value of GROUP can be set manually in a telephone by using the ## GROUP local craft procedure or, for H.323 telephones, it can be set ## remotely by CM based on the telephone's extension number. ## The default value of GROUP in each telephone is 0, ## and the maximum value is 999. ## ## To create a group of settings, use one of the templates below, ## or create others just like them. ## ############################################################## IF $GROUP SEQ 1 GOTO GROUP_1 IF $GROUP SEQ 2 GOTO GROUP_2 IF $GROUP SEQ 3 GOTO GROUP_3 IF $GROUP SEQ 4 GOTO GROUP_4 IF $GROUP SEQ 5 GOTO GROUP_5 GOTO END ############################################################## # GROUP_1 ########## Add SET Statements for GROUP 1 below ############ ################ END OF GROUP 1 SETTINGS ##################### GOTO END ############################################################## # GROUP_2 ########## Add SET Statements for GROUP 2 below ############ ################ END OF GROUP 2 SETTINGS ##################### GOTO END ############################################################## # GROUP_3 ########## Add SET Statements for GROUP 3 below ############ ################ END OF GROUP 3 SETTINGS ##################### GOTO END ############################################################## # GROUP_4 ########## Add SET Statements for GROUP 4 below ############ ################ END OF GROUP 4 SETTINGS ##################### GOTO END ############################################################## # GROUP_5 ########## Add SET Statements for GROUP 5 below ############ ################ END OF GROUP 5 SETTINGS ##################### GOTO END ############################################################## # END ############## END OF CONFIGURATION FILE #####################